Sony 3 270 589 12 (1) User Manual

3-270-589-12 (1)  
Professional Disc  
Recorder  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual  
thoroughly and retain it for future reference.  
The supplied CD-ROM includes operating instructions of the PDW-F75  
professional disc recorder (English, Japanese, French, German, Italian, Spanish  
and Chinese versions) in PDF format.  
Printed on recycled paper.  
PDW-F75  
Sony Corporation  
Printed in Japan  
© 2007 Sony Corporation  
CAUTION  
Important Safety Instructions  
The unit is not disconnected from the AC power source  
(mains) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if the  
unit itself has been turned off.  
• Read these instructions.  
• Keep these instructions.  
• Heed all warnings.  
• Follow all instructions.  
• Do not use this apparatus near water.  
• Clean only with dry cloth.  
• Do not block any ventilation openings.  
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
• Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat  
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)  
that produce heat.  
• Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with  
one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug has two  
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the  
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug  
dose not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for  
replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
• Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched  
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point  
where they exit from the apparatus.  
• Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
This symbol is intended to alert the user to  
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous  
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that  
may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute  
a risk of electric shock to persons.  
• Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table  
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.  
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/  
apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.  
This symbol is intended to alert the user to  
the presence of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
WARNING: THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR USA  
ONLY.  
• Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when  
unused for long periods of time.  
• Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing  
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any  
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid  
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,  
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does  
not operate normally, or has been dropped.  
If used in USA, use the UL LISTED power cord specified  
below.  
DO NOT USE ANY OTHER POWER CORD.  
Plug Cap  
Parallel blade with ground pin  
(NEMA 5-15P Configuration)  
Cord  
Length  
Rating  
Type SJT, three 16 or 18 AWG wires  
Minimum 1.5 m, Less than 2.5 m (8 ft 3 in)  
Minimum 10 A, 125 V  
WARNING  
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock,  
do not expose this apparatus to rain or  
moisture.  
Using this unit at a voltage other than 120 V may require the  
use of a different line cord or attachment plug, or both. To  
reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, refer servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the  
cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified  
personnel only.  
WARNING: THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR OTHER  
COUNTRIES.  
1. Use the approved Power Cord (3-core mains lead) /  
Appliance Connector / Plug with earthing-contacts that  
conforms to the safety regulations of each country if  
applicable.  
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.  
2. Use the Power Cord (3-core mains lead) / Appliance  
Connector / Plug conforming to the proper ratings  
(Voltage, Ampere).  
CAUTION  
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.  
No objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on  
the apparatus.  
2
If you have questions on the use of the above Power Cord /  
Appliance Connector / Plug, please consult a qualified service  
personnel.  
When installing the installation space must be secured in  
consideration of the ventilation and service operation.  
• Do not block the ventilation slots at the left side and right  
side panels, and vents of fans.  
• Leave a space around the unit for ventilation.  
• Leave more than 10 cm of space in the rear of the unit to  
secure the operation area.  
When the unit is installed on the desk or the like, leave at least  
5 cm of space in the left and right sides.  
This label is located on the top panel of the drive unit.  
Denna etikett finns på ovansidan av driftenheten.  
Denne mærkat sidder på drevenhedens øverste panel.  
Tämä kyltti sijaitsee ajurilaitteen yläpinnalla.  
This Professional Disc Recorder is classified as a CLASS 1  
LASER PRODUCT.  
Laser diode properties  
Wave length: 400 to 410 nm  
Emission duration: Continuous  
Laser output power: 135 mW (max. of pulse peak), 65 mW  
(max. of CW)  
Dette merket er plassert på oversiden av driverenheten.  
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)  
CAUTION  
The use of optical instruments with this product will increase  
eye hazard.  
Tekniska data för laserdiod  
Våglängd: 400 till 410 nm  
Emissionslängd: Kontinuerlig  
Laseruteffekt: 135 mW (max. för pulstopp), 65 mW (max. för  
kontinuerlig våg)  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures  
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous  
radiation exposure.  
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)  
VAROITUS!  
Egenskaber for laserdiode  
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ  
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA  
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1  
YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.  
Bølgelængde: 400 til 410 nm  
Strålingsvarighed: Kontinuerlig  
Afgivet lasereffekt: 135 mW (maks stråletoppunkt), 65 mW  
(maks ved kontinuerlig stråling)  
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)  
VARNING  
OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA  
BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN  
UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM  
ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.  
Laserdiodin ominaisuudet  
Aallonpituus: 400 - 410 nm  
Säteilyn kesto: jatkuva  
Laserin teho: 135 mW (pulssin huipun maks.), 65 mW  
(jatkuvan aallon maks.)  
Standardi: IEC60825-1 (2001)  
For the customers in the USA  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is  
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,  
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction  
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential  
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the  
user will be required to correct the interference at his own  
expense.  
3
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not  
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to  
operate this equipment.  
AVERTISSEMENT  
Afin de réduire les risques d’incendie ou  
d’électrocution, ne pas exposer cet  
appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.  
All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be  
shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device  
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
Afin d’écarter tout risque d’électrocution,  
garder le coffret fermé. Ne confier  
l’entretien de l’appareil qu’à un personnel  
qualifié.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
For the State of California, USA only  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery contains perchlorate.  
CET APPAREIL DOIT ÊTRE RELIÉ À LA  
TERRE.  
ATTENTION  
For customers in Canada  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-  
003.  
Eviter d’exposer l’appareil à un égouttement ou à des  
éclaboussures. Ne placer aucun objet rempli de liquide,  
comme un vase, sur l’appareil.  
For the customers in Europe  
Cet appareil n’est pas déconnecté de la source d’alimentation  
secteur tant qu’il est raccordé à la prise murale, même si  
l’appareil lui-même a été mis hors tension.  
This product with the CE marking complies with both the EMC  
Directive and the Low Voltage Directive issued by the  
Commission of the European Community.  
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the  
following European standards:  
AVERTISSEMENT  
1. Utilisez un cordon d’alimentation (câble secteur à 3 fils)/  
fiche femelle/fiche mâle avec des contacts de mise à la  
terre conformes à la réglementation de sécurité locale  
applicable.  
• EN60065: Product Safety  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the following  
Electromagnetic Environment(s):  
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3  
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV  
studio).  
2. Utilisez un cordon d’alimentation (câble secteur à 3 fils)/  
fiche femelle/fiche mâle avec des caractéristiques  
nominales (tension, ampérage) appropriées.  
Pour toute question sur l’utilisation du cordon d’alimentation/  
fiche femelle/fiche mâle ci-dessus, consultez un technicien du  
service après-vente qualifié.  
The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation, 1-7-1  
Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan.  
The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is  
Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327  
Stuttgart, Germany. For any service or guarantee matters  
please refer to the addresses given in separate service or  
guarantee documents.  
For the customers in Taiwan only  
WARNING  
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones  
can cause hearing loss.  
In order to use this product safely, avoid prolonged listening at  
excessive sound pressure levels.  
Cette étiquette est placée sur le panneau supérieur de l’unité  
de commande.  
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la  
norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
4
Pour les clients européens  
geprüften Stecker mit Schutzkontakten entsprechend den  
Sicherheitsvorschriften, die im betreffenden Land gelten.  
2. Verwenden Sie ein Netzkabel (3-adriges Stromkabel)/  
einen Geräteanschluss/einen Stecker mit den geeigneten  
Anschlusswerten (Volt, Ampere).  
Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme à la fois à la  
Directive sur la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) et à la  
Directive sur les basses tensions émises par la Commission  
de la Communauté Européenne.  
La conformité à ces directives implique la conformité aux  
normes européennes suivantes :  
• EN60065 : Sécurité des produits  
• EN55103-1 : Interférences électromagnétiques (émission)  
• EN55103-2 : Sensibilité électromagnétique (immunité)  
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les environnements  
électromagnétiques suivants : E1 (résidentiel), E2  
(commercial et industrie légère), E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4  
(environnement EMC contrôlé, ex. studio de télévision).  
Wenn Sie Fragen zur Verwendung von Netzkabel/  
Geräteanschluss/Stecker haben, wenden Sie sich bitte an  
qualifiziertes Kundendienstpersonal.  
Eigenschaften der Laserdiode  
Wellenlänge: 400 bis 410 nm  
Emissionsdauer. Ununterbrochen  
Laser-Ausgangsleistung: 135 mW (max. Impulsspitze), 65  
mW (max. Dauerstrich)  
Standard: IEC60825-1  
Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan,  
Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japon.  
Le représentant autorisé pour EMC et la sécurité des produits  
est Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327  
Stuttgart, Allemagne. Pour toute question concernant le  
service ou la garantie, veuillez consulter les adresses  
indiquées dans les documents de service ou de garantie  
séparés.  
AVERTISSEMENT  
Une pression acoustique excessive en provenance des  
écouteurs ou du casque peut provoquer une baisse de l’acuité  
auditive.  
Pour utiliser ce produit en toute sécurité, évitez l’écoute  
prolongée à des pressions sonores excessives.  
WARNUNG  
Um die Gefahr von Bränden oder  
elektrischen Schlägen zu verringern, darf  
dieses Gerät nicht Regen oder  
Dieser Aufkleber befindet sich oben auf der Antriebseinheit.  
Für Kunden in Europa  
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die  
EMV-Richtlinie sowie die Niederspannungsrichtlinie der EG-  
Kommission.  
Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden.  
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu  
vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht  
geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie  
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem  
Fachpersonal.  
Angewandte Normen:  
• EN60065: Sicherheitsbestimmungen  
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störaussendung)  
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störfestigkeit), für die folgenden elektromagnetischen  
Umgebungen:  
E1 (Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in beschränktem  
Maße industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im Freien) und  
E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio).  
DIESES GERÄT MUSS GEERDET  
WERDEN.  
ACHTUNG  
Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony Corporation, 1-7-1  
Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan.  
Das Gerät ist nicht tropf- und spritzwassersicher, daher dürfen  
keine mit Flüssigkeiten gefüllten Gegenstände, z. B. Vasen,  
darauf abgestellt werden.  
Der autorisierte Repräsentant für EMV und Produktsicherheit  
ist Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327  
Stuttgart, Deutschland. Bei jeglichen Angelegenheiten in  
Bezug auf Kundendienst oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte  
an die in den separaten Kundendienst- oder  
Solange das Netzkabel an eine Netzsteckdose  
angeschlossen ist, bleibt das Gerät auch im ausgeschalteten  
Zustand mit dem Strommetz verbunden.  
Garantiedokumenten aufgeführten Anschriften.  
WARNUNG  
VORSICHT  
1. Verwenden Sie ein geprüftes Netzkabel (3-adriges  
Stromkabel)/einen geprüften Geräteanschluss/einen  
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung falscher Batterien.  
Batterien nur durch den vom Hersteller empfohlenen oder  
einen gleichwertigen Typ ersetzen.  
5
Verbrauchte Batterien entsprechend den Anweisungen des  
Herstellers entsorgen.  
Für Kunden in Deutschland  
Entsorgungshinweis: Bitte werfen Sie nur entladene Batterien  
in die Sammelboxen beim Handel oder den Kommunen.  
Entladen sind Batterien in der Regel dann, wenn das Gerät  
abschaltet und signalisiert “Batterie leer” oder nach längerer  
Gebrauchsdauer der Batterien “nicht mehr einwandfrei  
funktioniert”. Um sicherzugehen, kleben Sie die Batteriepole  
z.B. mit einem Klebestreifen ab oder geben Sie die Batterien  
einzeln in einen Plastikbeutel.  
WARNUNG  
Zu hoher Schalldruck von Ohrhörern und Kopfhörern kann  
Gehörschäden verursachen.  
Um dieses Produkt sicher zu verwenden, vermeiden Sie  
längeres Hören bei sehr hohen Schalldruckpegeln.  
6
Table of Contents  
7
Table of Contents  
Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not End Normally (Salvage  
Functions) .................................................................................. 45  
Quick Scene Selection (Adding Sub Clips during Recording, Playback,  
or Search)................................................................................... 70  
8
Table of Contents  
9
Table of Contents  
10  
Table of Contents  
Overview  
1
Chapter  
1) MPEG HD is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Video bitrates and audio channels selectable  
according to application  
Features  
You can select the appropriate video bitrate for your  
application from three video bitrate modes: 35 Mbps (HQ:  
high quality mode), 25 Mbps (SP: standard mode), and 18  
Mbps (LP: long-play mode). You can select 2-channel or  
4-channel audio, with the ability to record 120 minutes or  
more of audio. If the audio channel modes are the same,  
different video bitrates can be mixed on the same disc.  
The PDW-F75 is a professional disc recorder supporting  
HD playback and recording with Professional Disc  
media.  
1)  
When you use this unit in combination with a nonlinear  
2)  
editing system, the FAM function enables data file  
transfers between the unit and computers over the i.LINK  
interface, allowing the unit to be used like an external hard  
drive. Its compact design, which also permits vertical  
placement, saves installation space on the desktop.  
The unit can be used as a player for video editing and  
program output, and as a recorder for nonlinear editing.  
For these applications, it can be connected to Sony  
nonlinear editors, monitors, and video equipment with  
HDSDI interfaces via its standard HDSDI I/O connectors.  
It incorporates a color LCD display, allowing you to check  
video and use the menu system without connecting an  
external monitor.  
Long recording times  
When two-layer Professional Discs are used, this unit can  
record about 190 minutes in SP mode and about 185  
minutes in DVCAM mode.  
Rich selection of recording and playback  
functions  
Support for multiple frame frequencies  
The unit can record and play back five different frame  
frequencies: 1080/59.94i (displayed as 60I), 50i (displayed  
as 50I), 29.97PsF (displayed as 30P), 25PsF, and  
23.98PsF. The unit features a standard 2-3 pulldown  
function, and can output 60I when playing back a disc  
recorded in 23.98PsF.  
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
2) FAM: File access mode  
Features of This Unit  
DVCAM recording  
The principal features of this unit are as follows.  
The optional PDBK-104 SD Input Upconverter Board is  
available for input of SDSDI or composite signals, to  
enable DVCAM-format recording.  
1)  
MPEG HD codec  
HD downconvert function  
High-quality video and audio recording and  
playback  
The unit is provided with a downconvert function. HD disc  
playback signals can be downconverted to SD signals and  
then output as SDSDI or composite signals, or output via  
the i.LINK (DV) interface. This allows you to shoot and  
record masters in an HD environment, and to use SD  
nonlinear editors and monitors for editing and program  
output.  
The MPEG HD codec provides video compression  
compliant with the MPEG-2 MP@HL standard. It enables  
HD 4:2:0 digital component file recording in the 1080i  
(1,080 effective scanning lines, interlaced) format  
currently in use by many broadcast facilities.  
Uncompressed PCM recording of 16-bit 48 kHz audio  
delivers a wide dynamic range with a high signal-to-noise  
ratio.  
11  
Features  
             
DVCAM upconvert function  
Input  
Output  
The unit features an upconvert function, with the ability to  
upconvert to HD and output HDSDI signals when playing  
back DVCAM discs.  
i.LINK (DV) output is also supported , allowing you to  
use nonlinear editors in a standard i.LINK (DV)  
environment.  
Analog video PDBK-103 (option  
(component) board)  
RGB/YPbPr/HD/VD  
D-sub 15-pin  
1)  
Analog audio Audio (2 channels)  
XLR connector ×2  
Audio (2 channels)  
XLR connector ×2,  
phono jack ×2  
1) Input (recording) is not supported.  
Convenient disc-based playback and  
search functions  
Recording of proxy AV data  
Proxy AV data is a low-resolution (1.5 Mbps video, 64  
kbps per audio channel), MPEG-4 based version of a full-  
resolution data stream. Whenever this unit records full-  
resolution MPEG HD data, it simultaneously generates  
and records low-resolution proxy AV data. Because of its  
small size, proxy AV data can be transferred quickly over  
computer networks, easily edited in the field with laptop  
Thumbnail searches  
An independent clip file is generated whenever recording  
starts and stops. The first frame of each clip is used as the  
1)  
thumbnail for that clip.  
You can display a list of thumbnails on the color LCD or  
an external monitor, and cue up a desired scene by  
selecting the corresponding thumbnail.  
1)  
computers, and readily used in a wide variety of  
applications, such as content management on small-scale  
servers.  
1) The Clip Continuous Rec function (see page 50) allows you to record a  
single clip even while repeatedly starting and stopping the recording. REC  
START essence marks are recorded at recording start points.  
1) The supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software can be used to create  
simple EDLs (Edit Decision Lists).  
Essence mark searches  
You can record essence marks at any scene during video  
recording, or at the recording stop position. You can  
display a list of essence mark scenes on the color LCD or  
an external monitor. Essence marks can also be added after  
recording with the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing  
Software. Shot marks (SHOT MARK1 and SHOT  
MARK2), which are a type of essence mark, can be added  
on this unit.  
Supports a variety of interfaces  
This unit supports the following interfaces.  
HDSDI: This enables input and output of HD digital video  
and embedded audio signals (4 channels).  
SDSDI: This enables output of SD component digital  
video and embedded audio signals (4 channels).  
AES/EBU: This enables input and output of AES/EBU  
serial digital audio signals (4 channels).  
i.LINK (AV/C): This enables output of DV-format digital  
video and audio signals (4 channels).  
Analog video: This enables output of HD analog  
component (RGB or YPbPr) and SD composite  
signals.  
Thumbnail expansion  
After selecting a clip in the thumbnail list, you can divide  
the clip into 12 parts and show a list of thumbnails for the  
first frame in each part. This makes it easy to find the scene  
you want within the clip. This expansion can be repeated  
up to 3 times (1,728 divisions).  
Analog audio: This enables input of 2 channels and output  
of 2 channels (1/2 or 3/4) of analog audio.  
You can also expand the section between a selected  
essence mark and the next essence mark.  
Input  
Output  
HDSDI  
SDSDI  
Video / audio (4  
channels)  
Video / audio (4  
channels)  
Scene selection  
You can create and play back clip lists of selected clips  
from the disc, arranged in any order. One disc can store up  
to 99 clip lists. Clip lists make it simple to perform offline  
editing in the field for later use with full-scale nonlinear  
editing systems.  
BNC connector  
BNC connector ×2  
PDBK-104 (option  
board)  
Video / audio (4  
channels)  
BNC connector  
Video  
Analog video PDBK-104 (option  
(composite)  
Repeat playback  
board)  
You can repeatedly play back any clip or clip list. Unlike  
tape, discs can return to the first frame as soon as the last  
frame is played, making this function ideal for  
presentations with a need for looping content.  
BNC connector,  
phono jack  
AES/EBU  
Audio (4 channels)  
BNC connector ×2  
Audio (4 channels)  
BNC connector ×2  
i.LINK (AV/C)  
Video / audio (4  
channels)  
i.LINK 6-pin  
i.LINK (TS)  
PDBK-102 (option board)  
12  
Features  
 
IT friendly  
PDBK-101 Network Board (Gigabit  
Ethernet)  
Computer access to files (file access mode)  
Video and audio clip data are recorded as files. The FAM  
function enables quick random access by computers to the  
video, audio, and metadata files stored on Professional  
Discs, with the ability to display thumbnail lists on the  
computer screen and perform file-based reads and writes.  
Installation of this board provides a gigabit Ethernet  
connector, which can be used to transfer disc files over  
LAN networks and to record MXF (Material eXchange  
Format) files from external devices to discs.  
It also allows this unit to be controlled remotely by FTP  
commands.  
1)  
1) XDCAM allows you to record various kinds of information about the  
video and audio data, such as the date of shooting, the editor, the recording  
format, and comments. This data can be used in the following ways.  
PDBK-102 MPEG-TS (Transport Stream)  
Input/Output Board  
The supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software can add titles,  
comments, and other text data to discs and clips.  
The ability to search metadata for the required audio and video scenes  
brings greater efficiency to various stages of the video production  
process (editing, archiving).  
Installation of this board enhances the functionality of the  
standard i.LINK connector, allowing it to be used as an  
I/O interface for HDV 1080i format compatible TS  
signals.  
1)  
2)  
3)  
Other features  
HD files recorded on the disc can be converted to TS  
signals compatible with the HDV1080i format for transfer  
to HDV devices and HDV editors, and TS signals from  
HDV devices and HDV editors can be converted to MPEG  
HD compatible files for recording by this unit.  
High-speed searches by the jog and shuttle dials  
Like conventional VTRs, this unit features jog and shuttle  
dials for searching for specific scenes within clips. The  
jog/variable mode supports –1 to +2 times normal speed  
searching in field units. The shuttle mode enables high-  
speed searching at up to 20 times normal speed.  
1) HDV and  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation and Victor  
Company of Japan, Limited.  
2) HDV1080i: Refers to devices compliant with the “HDV1080i Standard”  
for recording HD signals on DV tape. There are 1080 effective lines.  
3) TS: MPEG-2 transport streams containing MPEG video, MPEG audio,  
and control information. This is the standard interface for HDV  
equipment.  
Variety of remote control units  
• Infrared remote commander (supplied)  
• RS-232C 9-pin remote control  
• RS-422A 9-pin remote control  
• Minijack 4-pole remote control  
• HDSDI remote control  
PDBK-103 Analog HD Input Board  
Installation of this board provides analog HD component  
input connectors, to enable recoding of analog HD  
component input signals (RGB and YPbPr, Sync) to discs.  
Color LCD display  
The unit is equipped with a 16:9, 3.5-inch color LCD  
which allows you to check the contents of the disc and use  
the menu system without connecting an external monitor.  
PDBK-104 SD Input Upconverter Board  
Installation of this board provides SD input connectors to  
enable input of SD signals (SDSDI and composite), which  
can then be recorded on DVCAM-format discs or  
upconverted and recorded on HD-format discs.  
Features of the PDBK-101/102/103/  
104 Option Boards  
The following option boards provide expanded functions  
and interfaces for the unit.  
Note  
This unit cannot record non-standard composite signals,  
for example the output of VTRs that are not equipped with  
time base correctors.  
Notes  
• Contact your Sony service representative for more  
information about purchasing and installing option  
boards.  
• Up to two option boards may be installed. Some  
combinations are not supported.  
• Option slot 1: PDBK-101  
• Option slot 2: One of the PDBK-102, PDBK-103, and  
PDBK-104 boards  
13  
Features  
   
Using the CD-ROM  
Manual  
The supplied CD-ROM includes versions of the Operating  
Instructions for this unit in English, Japanese, French,  
German, Italian, Spanish, and Chinese in PDF format.  
Preparations  
The following program must be installed on your computer  
in order to read the Operating Instructions contained on the  
CD-ROM.  
• Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher  
Memo  
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it from  
the following URL:  
http://www.adobe.com/  
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in  
the United States and/or other countries.  
Reading the CD-ROM Manual  
To read the Operating Instructions contained on the CD-  
ROM, do the following.  
1
2
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive.  
A cover page appears automatically in your browser.  
If it does not appear automatically in the browser,  
double-click on the index.htm file on the CD-ROM.  
Select and click on the Operating Instructions that you  
want to read.  
This opens the PDF file of the Operating Instructions.  
Memo  
The files may not be displayed properly, depending on the  
version of Acrobat Reader. In such a case, install the latest  
version you can download from the URL mentioned in  
Note  
If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you can  
purchase a new one to replace it. Contact your Sony  
service representative.  
14  
Using the CD-ROM Manual  
       
Names and Functions of Parts  
Front Panel  
q; Disc slot and EJECT button  
1 On/standby 1  
EJECT  
F1  
switch and indicator  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
qa Infrared sensor  
2 ACCESS indicator  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
MENU  
F4  
F5  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
LEVEL  
PAGE DISPLAY  
3 Remote control switch  
4 LEVEL knob  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH 1  
CH 2  
CH 3  
CH 4  
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
5 PHONES jack  
6 SHIFT button  
7 MENU button  
qs RESET button  
8 SUB CLIP/CLIP MENU button  
qd SET button  
9 THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button  
1 Display and function menu section  
3 Arrow buttons  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
ACCESS  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
Handle  
CHAPTER  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
EXPAND  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
4 Shuttle/jog/  
variable-speed  
playback control  
block  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH 1  
CH 2  
CH 3  
CH 4  
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
2 Audio level adjustment section  
5 Recording/playback control block  
a On/standby 1 switch and indicator  
When using the unit, normally leave the rear panel  
POWER switch in the * (on) position, and use this switch  
to switch the unit between the operating and standby states.  
When the POWER switch (see page 24) on the rear panel  
is in the * (on) position, this switches the unit between the  
operating state (the indicator is lit green) and the standby  
state (the indicator is lit red).  
b ACCESS indicator  
When the indicator is lit red, pressing this switch puts the  
unit into the operating state. The indicator initially flashes  
green and then lights green when the unit enters the  
operating state.  
When the indicator is lit green, pressing this switch puts  
the unit into the standby state. The indicator initially  
flashes green, and then lights red when the unit enters the  
standby state.  
This lights blue while a disc is being accessed and while a  
file is open by a FAM or FTP connection. If the on/standby  
switch is pressed while this indicator is lit, the unit waits  
until access to the disc is completed before switching to the  
standby state.  
15  
Names and Functions of Parts  
           
SUB CLIP button: Press this button, turning it on, to  
perform playback of a clip list. A clip list selection  
screen appears. To play back the clips in the order  
they were recorded, press this button again, turning it  
off. The clip list selection screen disappears.  
Note  
Do not turn off the POWER switch on the rear panel or  
disconnect the power cord while the ACCESS indicator is  
lit. Doing so can result in a loss of data on the disc.  
c Remote control switch  
Different positions of the switch allow different  
Note  
This button does not light, and pressing it has no  
effect, when no clip lists are registered.  
operations, as follows.  
NETWORK: Enables access to the network. Operation  
from the front panel of the unit is disabled during  
access to a network device.  
LOCAL: Enables operation from the front panel of the  
unit.  
CLIP MENU button: Press this button, turning it on, to  
load, save, or delete a clip list. A clip list menu  
appears. To erase the clip list screen from the display,  
press the button again, turning it off.  
REMOTE: Enables remote control of this unit from the  
following devices.  
For details about clip lists, see Chapter 4 “Scene  
• Devices connected to external device connectors on  
the rear panel  
• Devices with HDSDI remote control functions  
• The optional remote control panel (not supplied)  
Use the setup menu item INTERFACE SELECT  
>REMOTE I/F to select which of the connectors is  
used for remote control (see page 103).  
i THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button  
This functions as a THUMBNAIL button when pressed  
alone, and as an ESSENCE MARK button when pressed  
together with the SHIFT button.  
THUMBNAIL button: Press this button, turning it on, to  
search for a frame by specifying a thumbnail (see  
page 53), and to create a clip list. A thumbnail  
selection screen appears on the display. To erase the  
selection screen from the display, press the button  
again, turning it off.  
d LEVEL (audio level adjustment) knob  
This adjusts the volume of the audio output from the  
PHONES jack. At the same time, it also adjusts the volume  
of the output from the AUDIO MONITOR connector on  
the rear panel.  
ESSENCE MARK button: Press this button, turning it  
on, to search for a frame by specifying an essence  
mark (see page 56), and to record an essence mark.  
An essence mark selection list appears. To erase the  
selection list from the display, press the button again,  
turning it off.  
e PHONES jack (stereo phone jack)  
Connect stereo headphones with an impedance of 8 ohms  
to monitor audio during recording, playback, and editing.  
The monitored channel is selected by the MONI CH and  
MONI SEL items on page P1 of the function menu (see  
j Disc slot and EJECT button  
Insert discs into the disc slot. The indicator flashes in  
orange, and lights in blue when the disc is completely  
loaded.  
Press the EJECT button to eject a disc. The indicator  
flashes in blue, and goes off when the disc is completely  
ejected.  
f SHIFT button  
When pressed together with a button having two functions,  
switches between the functions of the button.  
Function button names are displayed in white when the  
buttons are pressed alone, and in yellow when they are  
pressed together with the SHIFT button.  
k Infrared sensor  
This receives signals from the supplied remote  
commander.  
g MENU button  
Use this for system menu operations. The system menu  
appears in the display when this button is pressed. The  
same information is also superimposed on the display of a  
monitor connected to the unit.  
l RESET button  
Press this button to reset counters. This button is also used  
to cancel setup menu settings and abandon scene selections  
(thumbnail search), and to cancel other operations.  
Press once more to exit the menu.  
For more information about the system menu, see Chapter  
m SET button  
Press this button to confirm menu and scene selection  
(thumbnail search) settings, and to execute operations.  
h SUB CLIP/CLIP MENU button  
This functions as a SUB CLIP button when pressed alone,  
and as a CLIP MENU button when pressed together with  
the SHIFT button.  
16  
Names and Functions of Parts  
                             
For details about scene selection, see Chapter 4 “Scene  
1 Display and function menu section  
1 Display  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
2 F1 to F5 buttons  
F5  
PAGE DISPLAY  
3 DISPLAY/KEY INH button  
4 PAGE button  
q; Audio level meters  
qa Audio format  
5 Monitor video display section  
0
0
TCG  
6 Function  
menu  
EXT  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
TC MODE  
PRESET  
qs Recording/playback format  
qd Time data type  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
RUN MODE  
REC RUN  
-60  
-60  
1
2
3
4
+
4CH 16 BIT  
3
4
KEY INH  
REC INH  
REMOTE  
RS422A  
T C / V I T C  
V I T C  
MPEG HD  
SP  
VITC  
1080  
001/034  
60I  
INPUT  
REM:077M  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
qf Time data display section  
00:00.00:00  
REPEAT  
P2  
qg System line number  
qh Clip number  
7 Operation modes  
8 Remaining disc capacity  
9 Reference signal  
qj System frequency  
qk Audio monitor channels  
a Display  
c DISPLAY/KEY INH (key operation inhibit mode)  
button  
This functions as a DISPLAY button when pressed alone,  
and as a KEY INH button when pressed together with the  
SHIFT button.  
Normally this displays the audio level meters, timecode,  
monitor pictures, and current settings. It also displays  
menus and scene selection (thumbnail search) setting  
screens.  
DISPLAY button: Each press of this button switches the  
monitor video display section between its three  
display sizes.  
KEY INH button: Each press of this button turns key  
operation inhibit mode on or off.  
b F1 to F5 (Function 1 to Function 5) buttons  
These buttons are enabled when the function menu (see  
page 88) is visible. Each press of a button changes the  
setting of the corresponding item in the menu.  
When the SUB CLIP and THUMBNAIL buttons are lit,  
the F4 button functions as a CHAPTER button, and the F5  
button functions as an EXPAND button.  
d PAGE button  
This displays the function menu, if it is not already visible.  
(The most recently accessed page appears.) If the function  
menu is visible, this button switches between the function  
menu pages (HOME, P1, P2).  
17  
Names and Functions of Parts  
             
e Monitor video display section  
j Audio level meters  
This displays monitor video and the system menu.  
You can press the DISPLAY button to switch the display  
of monitor video between three sizes. The largest size  
occupies the full display screen.  
These display the audio recording levels (during  
recording) or audio playback levels (during playback) of  
channels 1 to 4. If an audio level exceeds 0 dB, the red  
indicator bar at the top lights.  
k Audio format  
Note  
During playback, this displays the number of recording  
audio channels on the disc and the number of quantization  
bits. During recording, this displays the input signal format  
selected with A1 INPUT to A4 INPUT on the HOME page  
of the function menu (see page 88). During display of E-  
Use the largest size to view superimposed information.  
f Function menu  
Use the PAGE button to display this menu, and to switch  
between the pages (HOME, P1, P2) of the menu. Each  
page has five setting items, which correspond to the F1 to  
F5 buttons. Press the corresponding button to change a  
setting.  
1)  
E video, this displays 2CH/16BIT (two channels, 16 bits)  
or 4CH/16BIT (four channels, 16 bits), according to the  
setting of AUDIO CONTROL >REC MODE in the setup  
menu (see page 101). Always displays 4CH/16BIT when  
the DVCAM format is being used.  
For details, see page 88 “Function Menu” in Chapter 6.  
1) E-E: Abbreviation of Electric to Electric. A mode in which input video and  
audio signals are output after passing through electric circuits only.  
g Operation modes  
This displays the current operation modes.  
KEY INH (key operation inhibit mode): Key operation  
inhibit mode has been turned on with the KEY INH  
button.  
REC INH (recording inhibit mode): Recording inhibit  
mode has been turned on by setting REC INH on page  
P1 of the function menu to “ON” (see page 89), or the  
currently loaded disc is write protected.  
l Recording/playback format  
This displays the following.  
During playback: Recording format of the loaded disc.  
During recording/E-E screen display/FAM connection:  
Signal format  
Compression method  
a)  
(video bit rate)  
MPEG HD  
HQ  
SP  
LP  
Note  
Recording inhibit mode is also turned on when the  
settings of the recorded part of the currently loaded  
disc do not match the current settings (number of  
recording audio channels, system frequency) of the  
unit.  
DVCAM  
a) Selected with OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >REC FORMAT in the  
setup menu (see page 94).  
m Time data type  
This displays the type of the time data that appears in the  
time data display section. The time data type is set with  
CNTR SEL on page P1 of the function menu (see page 89).  
COUNTER: Elapsed recording/playback time  
TC/VITC: Timecode  
REMOTE/interface name (remote mode): The remote  
control switch is set to “REMOTE”. (The interface  
name corresponds to the setting of INTERFACE  
SELECT >REMOTE I/F in the setup menu (see page  
103).)  
REPEAT (repeat mode): OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
>REPEAT MODE in the setup menu is set to “ON”  
UB/VIUB: User bits  
When TC or UB is selected, and VITC is selected under  
TC/VITC on page P2 of the function menu (see page 90),  
a VITC indicator appears, TC changes to VITC, and UB  
changes to VIUB.  
h Remaining disc capacity  
This displays the remaining capacity on the currently  
loaded disc.  
n Time data display section  
Normally this displays the time data selected with CNTR  
SEL on page P1 of the function menu (see page 89).  
Messages appear here when an error occurs and when the  
unit enters a different mode.  
i Reference signal  
This displays the type of reference signal to which this unit  
is synchronizing.  
When there is no display, the unit is synchronizing to the  
internal reference signal.  
INPUT: Input video  
HD REF: HD-format reference signal  
SD REF: SD-format reference signal  
o System line number  
This displays 1080, 525, or 625 depending on the signal  
format during recording, playback, FAM connection.  
18  
Names and Functions of Parts  
                                       
p Clip number  
m button: MARK2 button  
This displays the clip number of the clip being monitored.  
The clip number in the figure indicates that the first clip  
out of 34 clips is selected.  
< button: IN button  
, button: OUT button  
You can use these buttons for menu setting operations,  
thumbnail selection, setting or deleting In/Out points, and  
so on.  
q System frequency  
This displays the system frequency being used by this unit  
(60I, 50I, 30P, 25P, or 23.98P) (see page 27).  
1 </IN button and ,/OUT button  
MARK1  
r Audio monitor channels  
IN  
OUT  
This displays the audio monitor channels, as set with  
MONI CH and MONI SEL on page P1 of the function  
menu (see page 89).  
2 M/MARK1 button and m/MARK2 button  
MARK2  
3 IN indicator and OUT indicator  
When you are monitoring channels 1 and 2 (MONI CH is  
set to “CH 1/2”), the display changes as follows,  
depending on the setting of MONI SEL.  
a </IN button and ,/OUT button  
When the setup or disc menu is visible, use these buttons  
to change menu settings. When the THUMBNAIL button  
is lit, you can use these for thumbnail selection.  
An In or Out point is set when you press the SET button  
with the </IN or ,/OUT button held down. The In or  
Out point setting is deleted when you press the RESET  
button with the </IN or ,/OUT button held down.  
MONI SEL setting  
MONO L (monaural L)  
MONO R (monaural R)  
STEREO  
Display  
1
2
1
2
1 / 2  
1 + 2  
MIX  
2 Audio level adjustment section  
b M/MARK1 button and m/MARK2 button  
When the setup or disc menu is visible, use these buttons  
to change menu settings. When the THUMBNAIL button  
is lit, you can use these for thumbnail selection.  
During recording and playback, the M/MARK1 or m/  
MARK2 button can be pressed with the SET button held  
down to record a SHOT MARK1 or SHOT MARK2 as an  
essence mark.  
1 CH 1 to CH 4 knobs  
2 VARIABLE switch  
CH 1  
CH 2  
CH 3  
CH 4  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
To delete or change essence marks, use the supplied PDZ-  
1 Proxy Browsing Software. See “Using PDZ-1 Proxy  
Browsing Software” in Chapter 4 (page 79) for more  
information about installing the PDZ-1 software. See the  
online help of PDZ-1 for more information about using  
PDZ-1.  
a CH 1 to CH 4 (audio level) knobs  
Depending on the setting of the VARIABLE switch, these  
adjust the input audio or playback audio levels of CH 1 to  
CH 4.  
You can delete SHOT MARK1 and SHOT MARK2 in the  
CHAPTER screen. For details, see “To delete shot marks  
b VARIABLE (audio level adjustment selector)  
switch  
This selects whether the input audio or the playback audio  
has the levels adjusted by the CH 1 to CH 4 knobs.  
REC: Adjust the input audio levels. The playback audio  
levels are fixed at their preset values.  
PRESET: All of the audio levels are fixed at preset values.  
PB: Adjust the playback audio levels. The input audio  
levels are fixed at their preset values.  
c IN indicator and OUT indicator  
IN indicator: This lights when an In point exists. It flashes  
if an attempt is made to set an In point after a recorded  
Out point.  
OUT indicator: This lights when an Out point exists. It  
flashes if an attempt is made to set an Out point before  
a recorded In point.  
3 Arrow buttons  
The four arrow buttons are also used as the MARK1  
button, MARK2 button, IN button, and OUT button, as  
follows.  
M button: MARK1 button  
19  
Names and Functions of Parts  
                       
The shuttle dial has a detent at the center position, for still  
image playback.  
4 Shuttle/jog/variable-speed playback  
control block  
Note  
4 Jog/shuttle transport indicators  
When OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >SEARCH  
ENABLE in the setup menu is set to “DIAL DIRECT” (see  
page 95), return the shuttle dial to the center position after  
using it.  
VAR  
1 VAR button  
JOG  
2 JOG button  
SHUTTLE  
3 SHUTTLE  
5 Recording/playback control block  
button  
5 Jog dial  
1 PREV/TOP button  
2 PLAY button  
6 Shuttle dial  
3 NEXT/END button  
For details about playback operations with these buttons  
and dials, see page 51 “Playback” in Chapter 3.  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
a VAR (variable) button  
To play back in variable-speed mode using the shuttle dial,  
TOP  
END  
F REV  
F FWD  
STANDBY  
press this button, turning it on.  
4 STOP/STANDBY button  
b JOG button  
5 REC button  
To play back in jog mode using the jog dial, press this  
button, turning it on.  
a PREV (previous)/TOP button  
c SHUTTLE button  
To play back in shuttle mode using the shuttle dial, press  
this button, turning it on.  
This functions as a PREV button when pressed alone, and  
as a TOP button when pressed together with the SHIFT  
button.  
PREV button: Press this button, turning it on, to jump to  
the first frame of the current clip or the previous REC  
d Jog/shuttle transport indicators  
These show the playback direction in jog, shuttle, or  
variable-speed mode.  
b (green): Lights during playback in the reverse direction.  
B (green): Lights during playback in the forward  
direction.  
1)  
START essence mark. When pressed at the first  
frame of the current clip, this button jumps to the first  
frame of the previous clip (if it exists).  
TOP button: Press this button to jump to the first frame of  
the first clip or to the first REC START essence mark  
1)  
x (red): Lights during still image display.  
of the first clip.  
You can perform a high-speed search in the reverse  
direction by pressing the PREV button together with the  
PLAY button.  
e Jog dial  
Turn this for playback in jog mode. Turn clockwise for  
forward direction playback, and counterclockwise for  
reverse direction playback. In jog mode, the playback  
speed varies in the range 1 times normal speed, according  
to the rotation rate of the jog dial. The dial has no detents.  
1) The setting of OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >FIND MODE determines  
whether the unit jumps to clips or to REC START essence marks.  
When you play back clips recorded with the Clip Continuous Rec function  
(see page 50), you should set this menu item to “REC START EM”.  
f Shuttle dial  
b PLAY button  
Turn this for playback in shuttle mode or variable-speed  
mode. Turn clockwise for forward direction playback, and  
counterclockwise for reverse direction playback.  
• In shuttle mode, the playback speed varies in the range  
20 times normal speed (using MPEG HD/DVCAM),  
according to the angular position of the shuttle dial.  
• In variable-speed mode, you can finely adjust the  
playback speed from –1 to +2 times normal speed,  
according to the angular position of the shuttle dial.  
Press this button, turning it on, to start playback. Press the  
STOP button to stop playback.  
You can perform a high-speed search in the forward or  
reverse direction by pressing this button together with the  
NEXT button or PREV button.  
c NEXT/END button  
This functions as a NEXT button when pressed alone, and  
as an END button when pressed together with the SHIFT  
button.  
20  
Names and Functions of Parts  
                 
NEXT button: Press this button, turning it on, to jump to  
STOP button: Press this button, turning it on, to stop  
recording or playback. The frame at the stop position  
is displayed.  
the first frame of the next clip or the next REC  
1)  
START essence mark.  
END button: Press this button to jump to the last frame of  
STANDBY button: Press this button to put the unit into  
standby-off mode (the STOP button lights, and the  
STANDBY indicator goes off). Press it again to  
return to the original state (the STOP button lights,  
and the STANDBY indicator lights).  
the last clip or to the last REC START essence mark  
1)  
of the last clip.  
You can perform a high-speed search in the forward  
direction by pressing the NEXT button together with the  
PLAY button.  
This unit enters standby off mode automatically after  
a certain length of time passes.  
1) The setting of OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >FIND MODE determines  
whether the unit jumps to clips or to REC START essence marks.  
When you play back clips recorded with the Clip Continuous Rec function  
(see page 50), you should set this menu item to “REC START EM”.  
You can specify the length of time until the transition  
into standby off mode. For details, see the explanation  
of STILL TIMER in the setup menu (page 98).  
d STOP/STANDBY button  
e REC (record) button  
This functions as a STOP button when pressed alone, and  
as a STANDBY button when pressed together with the  
SHIFT button.  
Press this button together with the PLAY button to start  
recording. Recording starts on the unrecorded part of the  
disc.  
Press the STOP button to stop recording. A clip is created  
from the recorded section.  
Rear Panel  
4 Digital audio signal input/output  
section  
5 Timecode input/output section  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
TIME CODE  
IN OUT  
-AC IN  
R
L
1 Analog video signal  
POWER  
input/output section  
6 Power supply  
AUDIO INPUT  
2/4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
3/4  
section  
1/3  
1/3  
(AES/EBU)  
INPUT  
2 Analog audio signal  
input/output section  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
MONITOR  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
S400  
3 Digital signal input/  
CONTROL  
output section  
7 External device connection  
section  
21  
Names and Functions of Parts  
           
1 Analog video signal input/output  
2 Analog audio signal input/output  
section  
section  
1 AUDIO INPUT 1/3 and 2/4 connectors  
1 REF VIDEO INPUT connectors  
2 AUDIO OUTPUT 1/3 and 2/4  
2 COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
connectors  
connectors  
3 AUDIO MONITOR  
connectors  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
R
L
3 MONITOR  
connector  
AUDIO INPUT  
2/4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
1/3  
1/3  
MONITOR  
a AUDIO INPUT (analog audio signal input) 1/3 and  
2/4 connectors (XLR 3-pin, female)  
a REF VIDEO INPUT (reference video signal input)  
connectors (BNC type)  
The two connectors form a loop-through connection; when  
These connectors input two channels of analog audio.  
You can use the A1 INPUT to A4 INPUT items on the  
HOME page of the function menu (see page 88) to assign  
the signals input to connectors 1/3 (ANALOG1) and  
connectors 2/4 (ANALOG2) to audio channels 1 to 4.  
You can set the reference input levels with the setup menu  
item AUDIO CONTROL >LEVEL SELECT (the factory  
default settings are INPUT: +4 dB, REF LEVEL: 20 dB).  
a reference video signal is input to the left connector, the  
same signal is output from the right connector (  
) to a  
connected device. When no connection is made to the right  
connector, the left connector is automatically terminated  
with an impedance of 75 ohms.  
b COMPOSITE OUTPUT connectors (phono jack,  
BNC type)  
These output composite video signals.  
b AUDIO OUTPUT (analog audio signal output) 1/3  
and 2/4 connectors (XLR 3-pin, male)  
When CHAR SEL on page P1 of the function menu is set  
to “ON”, and DISPLAY CONTROL >SD CHARA in the  
setup menu is set to “COMPOSITE” or “ALL”,  
information such as timecode, menu settings, and error  
messages is superimposed on the output signals (see page  
40).  
These output two channels of analog audio.  
For 4-channel audio, you can use the INTERFACE  
SELECT >AUDIO OUTPUT item of the setup menu (see  
page 103) to select whether to output channels 1 and 2, or  
channels 3 and 4 (factory default setting: channels 1 and  
2).  
You can set the output level with the setup menu item  
AUDIO CONTROL >LEVEL SELECT (factory default  
setting: +4 dB) (see page 102).  
c MONITOR connector (D-sub 15-pin)  
This outputs HD analog video signals. The output signals  
can be switched with INTERFACE SELECT >D-SUB  
OUTPUT in the setup menu (see page 102).  
When CHAR SEL on page P1 of the function menu is set  
to “ON”, and DISPLAY CONTROL >HD CHARA in the  
setup menu is set to “ALL”, information such as timecode,  
menu settings, and error messages is superimposed on the  
output signals (see page 40).  
c AUDIO MONITOR connectors (phono jack)  
These output audio signals for monitoring.  
You can select the channels to monitor with MONI CH and  
MONI SEL on page P1 of the function menu (see page 89).  
22  
Names and Functions of Parts  
           
These input AES/EBU format digital audio signals. The  
1/2 connector corresponds to audio channels 1 and 2, and  
the 3/4 connector corresponds to audio channels 3 and 4.  
To handle input signals as non-audio data, use the AUDIO  
CONTROL >DATA MODE item of the setup menu (see  
page 102) to set the input of channels 1 and 2 (CH1/CH2  
IN) or the input of channels 3 and 4 (CH3/CH4 IN) to  
“DATA”.  
3 Digital signal input/output section  
1 HDSDI INPUT connector  
2 HDSDI OUTPUT connectors  
3 SDSDI OUTPUT  
connector  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
b DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUTPUT 1/2 and  
3/4 connectors (BNC type)  
These output AES/EBU format digital audio signals. The  
1/2 connector corresponds to audio channels 1 and 2, and  
the 3/4 connector corresponds to audio channels 3 and 4.  
a HDSDI (HD serial digital interface) INPUT  
connector (BNC type)  
This inputs HD format video and audio signals.  
5 Timecode input/output section  
b HDSDI (HD serial digital interface) OUTPUT  
connectors (BNC type)  
1 TIME CODE IN connector  
2 TIME CODE OUT connector  
These output HD format video and audio signals.  
When CHAR SEL on page P1 of the function menu is set  
to “ON”, and DISPLAY CONTROL >HD CHARA in the  
setup menu is set to “ALL” (or either “HDSDI2” or “ALL”  
for the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 connector), information such  
as timecode, menu settings, and error messages is  
superimposed on the output signals (see page 40).  
TIME CODE  
IN  
OUT  
a TIME CODE IN connector  
Inputs SMPTE timecode generated by an external device.  
c SDSDI OUTPUT connector (BNC type)  
This outputs SDSDI signals downconverted from HD  
video input signals, or the SDSDI signals being played  
back or being recorded.  
When CHAR SEL on page P1 of the function menu is set  
to “ON”, and DISPLAY CONTROL >SD CHARA in the  
setup menu is set to “SDI” or “ALL”, information such as  
timecode, menu settings, and error messages is  
superimposed on the output signals (see page 40).  
b TIME CODE OUT connector  
Outputs the following timecode, depending on the  
operating state of the unit.  
During playback: Playback timecode  
During recording: The timecode from the internal  
timecode generator or the timecode input to the TIME  
CODE IN connector.  
4 Digital audio signal input/output  
Note  
section  
In E-E mode no timecode is output if TIME CODE >EE  
OUT PHASE in the setup menu is set to “MUTING” (see  
1 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) INPUT  
1/2 and 3/4 connectors  
6 Power supply section  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
(AES/EBU)  
INPUT  
3/4  
1 - AC IN connector  
OUTPUT  
2 POWER switch  
-AC IN  
POWER  
2 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUTPUT  
1/2 and 3/4 connectors  
a DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) INPUT 1/2 and 3/4  
connectors (BNC type)  
23  
Names and Functions of Parts  
             
a -AC IN (AC power input) connector  
Connect to an AC power supply with the power cord (not  
supplied).  
c REMOTE(9P) (remote control 9-pin) connector  
(D-sub 9-pin, RS-422A compliant, female)  
To control this unit from a controller or VTR supporting  
the RS-422A Sony 9-pin VTR protocol, connect the device  
to this connector. When you use this connector, set the  
remote connector selector switch to the REMOTE(9P)  
side, and set INTERFACE SELECT > REMOTE I/F in the  
setup menu to “9PIN/RS-232C” (see page 103).  
b POWER (main power) switch  
Press the + side to power on the unit. Press the a side to  
power off.  
When using the unit, normally leave the POWER switch in  
the + (on) position, and use the on/standby switch on the  
front panel to switch the unit between the operating state  
and standby state.  
d Remote connector selector switch  
Push this switch to the side of the remote control connector  
you are using, either the RS232C connector or the  
REMOTE (9P) connector.  
Note  
If you press the on/standby switch on the front panel while  
the unit is in the operating state, the unit saves its data and  
then enters the standby state (the on/standby indicator  
lights red). Before turning the main power off, always  
check to be sure that the unit is in the standby state, and  
then push the main power switch to the a side.  
e
S400 connector (6-pin, IEEE1394 compliant)  
Connect a DV device or computer using an i.LINK cable.  
The following connection types are supported. They are  
selected by setting INTERFACE SELECT >i.LINK  
MODE in the setup menu (see page 103).  
AV/C (Audio/Video Control) connection: Output  
DVCAM format digital video and audio signals  
(i.LINK MODE set to “AV/C”).  
7 External device connection section  
Audio output signals are 2ch or 4ch, as selected by  
AUDIO CONTROL >DV OUT MODE in the setup  
1 CONTROL connector  
2 RS232C connector  
FAM (file access mode) connection: Input and output  
files between this unit and a computer (i.LINK  
MODE set to “FAM (PC REMOTE)”).  
3 REMOTE(9P) connector  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
S400  
CONTROL  
Notes  
• If video or audio signals from an external device  
connected to the S400 connector fail to be output,  
disconnect the i.LINK cable and connect it again,  
pushing it straight in.  
4
5
Remote connector  
selector switch  
S400 connector  
• Before connecting or disconnecting an i.LINK cable  
between this unit and a device with a 6-pin i.LINK  
connector, power off the device and disconnect its power  
cord from the electrical outlet. If the i.LINK cable is  
connected or disconnected with the device’s power plug  
still connected, high voltage (8 to 40 V) from the  
device’s i.LINK connector can flow into this unit,  
possibly damaging the unit.  
• When connecting this unit to a device with a 6-pin  
i.LINK connector, connect to the 6-pin i.LINK  
connector of the other device first.  
• Except in playback modes (jog and shuttle modes, etc.),  
audio signals output from this connector and monitored  
on another device may sound different from the audio  
signals played back on this unit.  
6 U terminal  
a CONTROL connector (minijack 4-pole)  
Connect the optional RM-LG2 Remote Control Unit.  
b RS232C (serial interface) connector (D-sub 9-pin,  
male)  
Connect a computer or other device with a serial interface  
to control this unit from that device.  
When you use this connector, set the remote connector  
selector switch to the RS232C side, and set INTERFACE  
SELECT >REMOTE I/F in the setup menu to “9PIN/RS-  
232C” (see page 103).  
Note  
f U (signal ground) terminal  
Connect to the system ground.  
This unit cannot be used as a recorder for linear editing.  
When it receives an assemble command, this unit starts  
normal recording operation and creates a new clip.  
24  
Names and Functions of Parts  
                 
PLAY key: Press this to start playback. Press the STOP  
key to stop playback.  
Infrared Remote Commander  
NEXT key: Press this to jump to the first frame of the next  
clip or to the next REC START essence mark.  
STOP key: Press this to stop recording or playback.  
The corresponding functions are executed when you point  
the remote commander at the infrared sensor of the main  
unit and press the keys and setting pad.  
1)  
If you want to disable control of this unit from the remote  
commander, set INTERFACE SELECT >WIRELESS  
RMT in the setup menu to “DISABLE” (see page 103).  
1) The setting of OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >FIND MODE determines  
whether the unit jumps to clips or to REC START essence marks.  
When you play back clips recorded with the Clip Continuous Rec function  
(see page 50), you should set this menu item to “REC START EM”.  
f SEARCH keys  
1 Setting pad  
Press m to perform –5 times normal speed shuttle  
playback in the reverse direction.  
PUSH SET  
2 THUMBNAIL key  
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP  
Press M to perform +5 times normal speed shuttle  
playback in the forward direction.  
3 CHARACTER key  
CHARACTER  
4 SUB CLIP key  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
Using the infrared remote commander  
5 Recording/playback  
control keys  
SEARCH  
Before use  
6 SEARCH keys  
Pull out the insulation sheet.  
Insulation sheet  
a Setting pad  
Positions on the pad correspond to functions of the main  
unit, as follows.  
Press the top side: M/MARK1 button  
Press the bottom side: m/MARK2 button  
Press the left side: </IN button  
Press the right side: ,/OUT button  
Press the middle: SET button  
To replace the lithium battery in the remote  
commander  
The remote commander uses a CR2025 Lithium Battery.  
Do not use a battery other than the CR2025.  
b THUMBNAIL key  
This has the same function as the THUMBNAIL button on  
the main unit.  
1
Hold down the lock lever 1, and then pull out the  
battery holder 2.  
c CHARACTER key  
Each press of this key turns the character information  
superimposed on the monitor screen on and off, or  
switches to the LCD.  
d SUB CLIP key  
This has the same function as the SUB CLIP button on the  
2
main unit.  
1
Note  
2
Insert a new battery with the + symbol facing upward  
(1), and then push the battery holder until it clicks  
(2).  
Pressing this key has no effect when no clip list is  
registered.  
e Recording/playback control keys  
PREV (previous) key:Press this to jump to the first frame  
of the current clip or the previous REC START  
1)  
essence mark. When pressed at the first frame of the  
current clip, this button jumps to the first frame of the  
previous clip (if it exists).  
25  
Names and Functions of Parts  
         
Face the + symbol upward.  
2
1
WARNING  
Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge,  
disassemble or dispose of in fire.  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type  
recommended by the manufacturer.  
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
ATTENTION  
Danger d’explosion si la batterie n’est pas replacée  
correctement.  
Remplacez-la uniquement avec le même type ou un type  
équivalent recommandé par le fabricant.  
Disposez des batteries usagées selon les instructions du  
fabricant.  
VORSICHT  
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung falscher Batterien.  
Batterien nur durch den vom Hersteller empfohlenen oder  
einen gleichwertigen Typ ersetzen.  
Verbrauchte Batterien entsprechend den Anweisungen des  
Herstellers entsorgen.  
Battery lifetime  
When the lithium battery output falls, even button presses  
may not operate. The average lithium battery lifetime is  
about one year, but this depends on the pattern of use.  
If pressing the remote control buttons produces absolutely  
no effect on this unit, replace the battery, then check the  
operation again.  
26  
Names and Functions of Parts  
Preparations  
2
Chapter  
SYSTEM SEL  
Setting the System  
Frequency  
SYSTEM FREQ:  
60I  
50I  
30P  
25P  
23.98P  
This unit is shipped with the system frequency still unset.  
Therefore, you need to set the system frequency before  
using the unit. (The unit cannot be used unless the system  
frequency is set.)  
SELECT : ( )( )KEY  
DATA SET :  
SET KEY  
Once it is set, the system frequency is retained even when  
the unit is powered off.  
2
3
Press the M/MARK1 button or the m/MARK2 button  
to select the system frequency to use.  
To set the system frequency  
Use the following procedure.  
Press the SET button.  
“NOW SAVING...” appears in the time data display  
section, and the modified setting is saved in the unit’s  
memory.  
Rear panel  
“COMPLETE ! !” appears when save processing  
finishes.  
POWER  
POWER  
switch  
1
2
If you have selected 60I, 30P, or 23.98P  
When you press the SET button with 60I, 30P, or  
23.98P selected in step 2, the following screen  
appears.  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
0
0
TCG  
EXT  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
TC MODE  
PRESET  
-30  
-40  
-60  
-30  
-40  
-60  
ACCESS  
RUN MODE  
REC RUN  
1
2
3
4
VAR  
MARK1  
+
NETWORK  
4CH 16 BIT  
3
4
T C / V I T C  
V I T C  
MENU  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
MPEG HD  
SP  
VITC  
1080 60I  
COOO1  
LOCAL  
REM:077M  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
P2  
00:00.00:00  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SYSTEM SEL  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
SYSTEM FREQ : 601  
UC/J SELECT :  
UC  
UCP  
J
Time data display section  
4
3
1
Power the unit on.  
SELECT : ( )( )KEY  
DATA SET :  
SET KEY  
“SYSTEM SEL” appears in the time data display  
section.  
Press the M/MARK1 and m/MARK2 buttons to select  
“UC” (for areas outside Japan) or “J” (for Japan), then  
press the SET button.  
27  
Setting the System Frequency  
           
Note  
Connections and  
Settings  
Be sure to carry out step 3 before powering the unit off  
(putting it into standby). The new system frequency  
setting will not be saved if you power off without  
carrying out step 3.  
Note  
4
Press the on/standby switch to power the unit off (put  
it into standby), and then press it again to power the  
unit on.  
Production of some of the peripherals and related devices  
described in this chapter has been discontinued.  
For advice about choosing devices, please contact your  
Sony dealer or a Sony sales representative.  
The selected system frequency becomes available for  
use.  
You can change the system frequency setting by using the  
setup menu item OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >SYSTEM  
SEL >SYSTEM FREQ.  
For details about the setup menu, see page 90 “System  
Menu” in Chapter 6.  
Connecting an External Monitor  
You can connect a video monitor to this unit’s video output  
connectors or to the MONITOR connector. The following  
figure shows an example using a Sony multi-format LCD  
monitor.  
Note  
You can also superimpose character information such as  
timecode and the unit’s operating status on output video.  
40).  
When the system frequency is set to 60I or 30P, select  
drop-frame mode (DF) or non-drop-frame mode (NDF) on  
page P2 of the function menu (see page 90).  
To view HD video  
Connect an HD video monitor using method 1 or 2 in  
the following figure.  
When you connect a monitor with method 2, set the setup  
menu item INTERFACE SELECT >D-SUB OUTPUT to  
“YPbPr” (see page 102).  
28  
Connections and Settings  
             
COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MONITOR  
TIME CODE  
AUDIO  
MONITOR  
TIME CODE  
PDW-F75 (this unit)  
PDW-F75 (this unit)  
CMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
-AC IN  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
-AC IN  
R
L
IN  
OUT  
POWER  
R
L
IN  
OUT  
POWER  
AUDIO INPUT  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
3/4  
AUDIO INPUT  
2/4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
3/4  
1/3  
2/4  
1/3  
(AES/EBU)  
1/3  
1/3  
(AES/EBU)  
INPUT  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
1
2
MONITOR  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
MONITOR  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
S400  
S400  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
SDSDI  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
2
1
2
1
2
SDI signal input  
connector  
2
a)  
COMPOSITE  
IN connector  
SDI signal input  
connector  
Y/P /P  
R
connectors  
B
a)  
AUDIO IN  
connector  
AUDIO IN  
connector  
MEU-WX2 Multi-Format Engine  
MEU-WX2 Multi-Format Engine  
LMD-172W/232W Multi-Format LCD Monitor  
LMD-172W/232W Multi-Format LCD Monitor  
a) To input SDSDI signals, a BKM-220D (not supplied) is required.  
a) To input HDSDI signals, a BKM-243HS (not supplied) is required.  
Connection method and connection cables  
Connection method and connection cables  
Connection method  
Connection cables (not  
supplied)  
Connection method Connection cables (not  
supplied)  
1
2
SDSDI  
75Ω coaxial cable  
Composite  
75Ω coaxial cable, phono  
plug – stereo miniplug cable  
1 HDSDI  
75Ω coaxial cable  
2 Component  
D-Sub 15-pin – analog  
(Y/P /P )  
component cable, phono plug –  
stereo miniplug cable  
B
R
Using PDZ-1 over an i.LINK  
Connection (FAM Connection)  
To view SD video  
Connect an SD video monitor using method 1 or 2 in the  
following figure.  
You can use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software  
to do simple editing of proxy AV data. The following  
explains how to make an i.LINK connection between this  
unit and a computer with PDZ-1 installed, and how to  
access this unit by FAM (file access mode).  
Notes  
• The required FAM driver is installed when you install  
the PDZ-1 software.  
• Use version 2.01 or higher of the FAM driver.  
29  
Connections and Settings  
               
• This unit’s S400 connector has 6 pins. Check the  
number of pins on the i.LINK connector of your  
notebook computer, and use an appropriate i.LINK  
cable.  
Notes  
• The S400 connector of this unit outputs video/audio  
signals in DVCAM format. Data recorded in MPEG HD  
format is output after being converted into DVCAM  
format.  
• The nonlinear editing system to be connected to this unit  
requires editing software (not supplied) supporting the  
DVCAM format.  
See “Using PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software” in Chapter  
4 (page 79) for more information about installing the  
PDZ-1 software. See the online help of PDZ-1 for more  
information about using PDZ-1.  
• To transfer video and audio signals (AV/C data), use  
AUDIO CONTROL >DV OUT MODE (see page 102)  
in the setup menu to select the audio mode (the factory  
default is “2ch”).  
Some limitations apply to FAM connections. For details,  
in Chapter 5 (page 83).  
• This unit’s S400 connector has 6 pins. Check the  
number of pins on the i.LINK connector of your laptop  
computer, and use an appropriate i.LINK cable.  
PDW-F75 (this unit)  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
TIME CODE  
IN OUT  
-AC IN  
R
L
POWER  
AUDIO INPUT  
2/4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
3/4  
PDW-F75(this unit)  
1/3  
1/3  
(AES/EBU)  
INPUT  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
TIME CODE  
IN OUT  
-AC IN  
R
L
POWER  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
1
SDSDI OUTPUT  
2
MONITOR  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
AUDIO INPUT  
2/4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
3/4  
S400  
CONTROL  
1/3  
1/3  
(AES/EBU)  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
S400  
MONITOR  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
S400  
CONTROL  
S400  
i.LINK cable  
(not supplied)  
i.LINK cable  
(not supplied)  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector  
Laptop computer  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector  
Laptop computer  
On the computer  
On this unit  
Install PDZ-1.  
Set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT  
>REMOTE I/F to “i.LINK” (see  
On the computer  
On this unit  
Install editing software  
supporting the DVCAM  
format.  
Set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT  
>REMOTE I/F to “i.LINK” (see  
Set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT >i.LINK  
MODE to “FAM(PC REMOTE)”  
Set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT >i.LINK  
MODE to “AV/C” (see page  
103).  
Connecting to a Nonlinear Editing  
System (AV/C Connection)  
Connections for Cut Editing  
You can send video/audio signals (AV/C data) from this  
unit to a nonlinear editing system connected to the S400  
connector.  
By connecting this unit to a VTR, you can configure a cut  
editing system. Some example connections are shown in  
the following.  
The following figure shows an example connection.  
Connection)” (page 29) for the connections and settings to  
make a FAM connection between this unit and a nonlinear  
editing system.  
Note  
This unit cannot be used as a recorder for linear editing.  
When it receives an assemble command, this unit starts  
normal recording operation and creates a new clip.  
30  
Connections and Settings  
           
When making the connections, also refer to the manuals  
provided with the equipment to be connected.  
See page 34 for more information about editing control  
unit settings.  
When using an editing control unit  
The following figure shows a cut editing system  
comprising this unit as a player, an HDW-M2000/M2000P  
unit as a recorder, and a BVE-700A as an editing control  
unit.  
HD video monitor  
1: 75Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
2: 9-pin remote control cable (not supplied)  
To analog audio  
input connector  
3: Phono plug – stereo miniplug cable  
(not supplied)  
To HDSDI input  
connector  
3
1
HDSDI  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO  
PDW-F75 (this unit, player)  
MONITOR  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
TIME CODE  
IN OUT  
-AC IN  
1
R
L
POWER  
Reference video signal  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO INPUT  
2/4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
3/4  
1/3  
1/3  
(AES/EBU)  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
MONITOR  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
S400  
CONTROL  
HDSDI  
REMOTE(9P)  
Remoteconnector  
selector switch  
OUTPUT  
1
2
1
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
HDSDI  
INPUT  
PLAYER-1  
75Ω  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
SDI OUT  
SDI IN  
1
AC IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT2  
VIDEO  
OUT1  
AUX/  
TITLE  
RECORDER  
PLAYER-2  
PLAYER-1  
PLAYER-1  
PLAYER-3  
SWER  
MIXER  
RECORDER  
PLAYER-3  
PLAYER-2  
NETWORK  
PANEL  
GPI  
EDL  
REF VIDEO IN  
REF  
RECORDER  
VIDEO IN  
BVE-700A(editing  
control unit)  
HDSDI  
1
OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER)  
HDW-M2000/M2000P  
(recorder)  
REMOTE 1-IN(9P)  
2
To HDSDI input connector  
HD video monitor  
31  
Connections and Settings  
     
Reference  
video signal  
HDW-M2000/M2000P  
(recorder) settings  
This unit (player) settings  
HD video monitor  
To HDSDI input connector  
REMOTE 1(9P) button: Lit Set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT  
To analog audio input  
connector  
>REMOTE I/F to “9PIN/RS-  
232C” (see page 103).  
1
1
3
Remote control switch:  
REMOTE  
PDW-F75  
(this unit, player)  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
HDSDI  
AUDIO  
MONITOR  
TIME CODE  
OUTPUT  
Remote connector selector  
switch: REMOTE(9P)  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
-AC IN  
R
L
IN  
OUT  
POWER  
AUDIO INPUT  
2/4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
3/4  
1/3  
1/3  
(AES/EBU)  
INPUT  
For details about the settings of the HDW-M2000/  
M2000P, refer to the operation manual for the unit.  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
MONITOR  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
S400  
CONTROL  
When using the editing functions of the  
recorder (connections using the REMOTE  
(9P) connector)  
Remote connector  
selector switch  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
HDSDI  
REMOTE(9P)  
OUTPUT  
2
1
The following figure shows a cut editing system  
comprising this unit as a player and an HDW-M2000/  
M2000P unit as a recorder. In this example, video and  
audio signals are connected by SDI, and control signals are  
transferred via the REMOTE(9P) connector.  
1
HDW-M2000/M2000P  
(recorder)  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
HDSDI  
INPUT  
75Ω  
HDSDI  
OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER)  
1
REMOTE 1-OUT(9P)  
To HDSDI input connector  
HD video monitor  
1: 75Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
2: 9-pin remote control cable (not supplied)  
3: Phono plug – stereo miniplug cable (not supplied)  
HDW-M2000/M2000P  
(recorder) settings  
This unit (player) settings  
REMOTE 1(9P) button:  
Unlit  
Set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT  
>REMOTE I/F to “9PIN/RS-  
232C” (see page 103).  
Remote control switch:  
REMOTE  
32  
Connections and Settings  
   
HDW-M2000/M2000P  
(recorder) settings  
This unit (player) settings  
SD video monitor  
To composite video input connector  
To analog audio input connector  
75Ω termination switch:  
ON  
Remote connector selector  
switch: REMOTE(9P)  
For details about the settings of the HDW-M2000/  
M2000P, refer to the operation manual for that unit.  
2
1
COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO  
MONITOR  
TIME CODE  
PDW-F75 (this unit, player)  
When using the editing functions of the  
recorder (connections using the S400  
connector)  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
-AC IN  
R
L
IN  
OUT  
POWER  
AUDIO INPUT  
2/4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
2/4  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
1/2  
1/2  
3/4  
3/4  
1/3  
1/3  
(AES/EBU)  
INPUT  
The following figure shows a cut editing system  
comprising this unit as a player and a DSR-2000A/2000AP  
unit as a recorder. In this system, video/audio signals and  
control signals are all transferred through the S400  
connector.  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
MONITOR  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
S400  
CONTROL  
S400  
4
DSR-2000A/2000AP (recorder)  
i.LINK  
VIDEO OUT 3  
(SUPER)  
MONITOR  
AUDIO  
1
To composite  
video input  
connector  
3
To analog audio input connector  
SD video monitor  
1: 75Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
2: Phono plug – stereo miniplug cable (not supplied)  
3: Phono plug cable (not supplied)  
4: i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
DSR-2000A/2000AP  
(recorder) settings  
This unit’s (player) settings  
i.LINK button: Lit  
Remote control switch:  
REMOTE  
SDTI/i.LINK button: i.LINK Set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT  
>REMOTE I/F to “i.LINK” (see  
For details about the settings of the DSR-2000A/2000AP,  
refer to the operating instructions for that unit.  
33  
Connections and Settings  
 
Editing Control Unit Settings  
External Synchronization  
When connecting an editing control unit to use with this  
unit, make the following settings.  
This unit synchronizes as shown in the following table,  
according to the presence or absence of signals input to the  
HDSDI INPUT connector, the presence or absence of  
signals input to the REF VIDEO INPUT connector, and  
the setting of the V INPUT item on the HOME page of the  
function menu (see page 88).  
BVE-700/700A/2000/9100  
Set VTR constants as follows.  
System  
frequency  
VTR CONSTANT 1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal  
input to  
HDSDI  
INPUT  
Signal  
V INPUT External  
setting synchronization  
30P/60I  
25P/50I  
24P  
A0 98  
A1 98  
A2 98  
00  
00  
00  
96  
16  
16  
16  
16  
03  
03  
03  
80  
80  
80  
input to  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
7D 16  
78  
16  
connector connector  
Yes Yes  
HDSDI  
Synchronize to  
HDSDI input  
System  
VTR CONSTANT 2  
a)  
frequency  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Playback:  
30P/60I  
25P/50I  
24P  
0A 07  
0A 07  
0A 07  
FE 00  
FE 00  
FE 00  
80  
80  
80  
5A FF 5A  
4C FF 4B  
Synchronize to  
REF VIDEO  
b)  
input  
48  
FF 48  
Recording:  
Synchronize to  
HDSDI input  
b)  
Remote Control Unit Settings  
SG  
Synchronize to sREF  
VIDEO input  
You can control this unit from an RM-280 Remote Control  
Unit.  
Connect this unit to the RM-280 with a 9-pin remote  
control cable (not supplied), and make the settings in the  
following table.  
Yes  
No  
HDSDI  
SG  
Synchronize to  
HDSDI input  
No external  
synchronization  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
HDSDI  
SG  
Synchronize to REF  
VIDEO input  
RM-280 settings  
Settings on this unit  
EDITOR/REMOTE  
CONTROL:  
REMOTE  
Setup menu item INTERFACE  
SELECT >REMOTE I/F (see  
page 103): 9PIN/RS-232C  
HDSDI  
SG  
No external  
synchronization  
CONTROL  
a) When VIDEO CONTROL >REFERENCE SEL in the setup menu is set to  
“INPUT”.  
Setup menu item 19  
FNC MODE:  
XDCAM  
Remote control switch: REMOTE  
b) When VIDEO CONTROL >REFERENCE SEL in the setup menu is set to  
“AUTO”.  
Remote connector selector  
switch: REMOTE(9P)  
Note  
There is no external synchronization for file operations by  
FAM connection (see page 83).  
34  
External Synchronization  
                 
DATE/TIME PRESET  
Setup  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
2006  
04  
08  
The principal setup operations before operating this unit  
are carried out using setup menus.  
TIME 10:09:17  
TIME ZONE UTC_00:00  
This section explains how to set the date and time and how  
to adjust the brightness of the LCD panel.  
INC/DEC : JOG DIAL  
SHIFT : ( )( )KEY  
DATE SAVE : SET KEY  
TO MENU : MENU KEY  
See Chapter 6 “Menus” (page 88) for more information  
about menu operations and menu items.  
This screen allows you to set the following items.  
YEAR: Calendar year  
MONTH: Month  
DAY: Day  
Setting the Date and Time  
TIME: Time  
TIME ZONE: Time zone (difference from UTC)  
When using this unit for the first time, you should set the  
date and time as follows.  
3
Set the date, time and time zone.  
Note  
You can change the setting of the flashing digits.  
Before starting, press the DISPLAY button to set the  
monitor video section to its largest size. Or connect an  
external video monitor to this unit and superimpose menus  
(see page 40) on the monitor screen.  
To change the flashing digits  
Use the arrow buttons (</IN, ,/OUT).  
To increase or decrease the values of the flashing  
digits  
1,4 3 2,3  
Use the arrow buttons (M/MARK1, m/MARK2) or jog  
dial.  
EJECT  
F1  
0
0
TCG  
EXT  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
TC MODE  
PRESET  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
ACCESS  
RUN MODE  
REC RUN  
-60  
-60  
To return the settings to the initial values  
Press the RESET button.  
1
2
3
4
VAR  
MARK1  
+
NETWORK  
4CH 16 BIT  
3
4
T C / V I T C  
V I T C  
MENU  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
MPEG HD  
SP  
VITC  
1080 60I  
COOO1  
LOCAL  
REM:077M  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
P2  
00:00.00:00  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
4
When you have made the necessary settings, press the  
SET button.  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears, the settings  
are saved, and the menu closes.  
4 3  
3
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
To clear the menu from the screen without saving  
settings  
Press the MENU button twice in succession.  
The system menu appears on the monitor screen (see  
Select DATE/TIME PRESET using the M/MARK1  
button or m/MARK2 button, then press the ,/OUT  
button.  
Adjusting the Brightness of the LCD  
Panel  
The DATE/TIME PRESET screen appears on the  
monitor.  
Proceed as follows to adjust the brightness of the LCD  
panel.  
Note  
Before starting, press the DISPLAY button to set the  
monitor video section to its largest size. Or connect an  
external video monitor to this unit and superimpose menus  
(see page 40) on the monitor screen.  
35  
Setup  
             
To increase or decrease the values of the flashing  
digits  
Use the arrow buttons (M/MARK1, m/MARK2) or jog  
dial.  
1 5 2,3,4,5  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
0
0
TCG  
EXT  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
TC MODE  
PRESET  
-30  
-40  
-60  
-30  
-40  
-60  
ACCESS  
RUN MODE  
REC RUN  
1
2
3
4
VAR  
MARK1  
+
NETWORK  
4CH 16 BIT  
3
4
T C / V I T C  
V I T C  
MENU  
To return the settings to the factory defaults  
Press the RESET button.  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
MPEG HD  
SP  
VITC  
1080 60I  
COOO1  
LOCAL  
REM:077M  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
P2  
00:00.00:00  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
6
When you are finished making adjustments, press the  
SET button.  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears, the settings  
are saved, and the menu closes.  
6 5  
5
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
To clear the menu from the screen without saving  
adjustments  
Press the MENU button twice in succession.  
The system menu appears on the monitor screen (see  
Select SETUP MENU using the M/MARK1 button or  
m/MARK2 button, then press the ,/OUT button.  
The setup menu appears on the monitor screen (see  
3
4
Select DISPLAY CONTROL using the M/MARK1  
button or m/MARK2 button, then press the ,/OUT  
button.  
The DISPLAY CONTROL menu appears on the  
monitor screen (see page 95).  
Select BRIGHTNESS using the M/MARK1 button or  
m/MARK2 button, then press the ,/OUT button.  
The LCD BRIGHTNESS screen appears on the  
monitor.  
SETUP MENU  
LCD BRIGHTNESS  
preset :55H  
55 (HEX)  
SHIFT : ( )( )KEY  
INC/DEC : JOG DIAL  
TO MENU : MENU KEY  
5
Adjust the brightness while viewing the screen.  
You can change the values of digits which flash in the  
settings screen. Setting values are hexadecimal (00 to  
7F (HEX)).  
To change the flashing digits  
Use the arrow buttons (</IN, ,/OUT).  
36  
Setup  
7
Press the ,/OUT button.  
24P (23.98P) Mode  
Settings  
The third level of the menu appears.  
]
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
SYSTEM SEL  
SYSTEM FREQ : 60I  
Selecting the Playback Mode  
(23.98PsF or 2-3 Pulldown)  
UC/J  
: J  
23.9P OUTPUT: PsF  
When the setup menu item SYSTEM FREQ is set to  
“23.98P”, you can set monitor output to either 23.98PsF  
mode or 2-3 pulldown mode.  
1
Press the MENU button.  
8
9
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“SYSTEM FREQ”.  
The system menu (see page 90) appears.  
Press the ,/OUT button.  
2
3
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
SETUP MENU.  
Setting values appear.  
Press the ,/OUT button.  
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
The setup menu appears.  
SYSTEM SEL  
SYSTEM FREQ : 601  
* 60I  
50I  
4
Press the M/MARK1 button to select  
“OPERATIONAL FUNCTION”.  
30P  
25P  
23.98P  
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
TIME CODE  
DISC PROTECTION  
VIDEO CONTROL  
10Press the m/MARK2 button to select “23.98P”.  
AUDIO CONTROL  
INTERFACE SELECT  
METADATA  
11If you want to change the monitor output setting as  
well, press the </IN button to return to the higher  
level screen (the state of step 7). If you do not want to  
change the monitor output setting, proceed to step 15.  
SETUP BANK OPERATION  
:ENHAN  
MENU GRADE  
5
Press the ,/OUT button.  
12Press the m/MARK2 button to select “23.9P  
OUTPUT”.  
The second level of the OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
menu appears.  
13Press the ,/OUT button.  
SETUP MENU  
The setting value appears.  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
REPEAT MODE  
AUTO EE SELECT  
LOCAL ENABLE  
REC FORMAT  
:OFF  
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
SYSTEM SEL  
:STP&EJ  
:SP  
DISC END  
:EJECT  
23.9P OUTPUT: PsF  
* 23.98PsF  
CLIP TITLE  
FILE NAMING  
SYSTEM SEL  
2-3 PULL DOWN  
SEARCH ENABLE  
VAR SPD LIMIT  
:DIAL  
:OFF  
6
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“SYSTEM SEL”.  
37  
24P (23.98P) Mode Settings  
   
14Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
Timecode display  
one of the following.  
Type  
23.98PsF  
2-3 PULL DOWN  
23.98PsF: Output as 23.98P.  
2-3 PULL DOWN: Output after pulldown conversion  
to 59.94i.  
LTC display  
PDT display  
VITC display  
24-frame timecode  
30-frametimecode  
after pulldown  
conversion  
24-frametimecode  
15Press the SET button.  
COUNTER display 24-frame signals  
30-frame signals  
after pulldown  
conversion  
A confirmation message appears.  
16Press the SET button to confirm the changes, or the  
RESET button to cancel them.  
Timecode in remote timecode mode  
Type  
23.98PsF  
2-3 PULL DOWN  
If you have pressed the SET button, power the unit off  
and on again to enable the changes.  
9-pin preset  
timecode  
24-frame timecode  
9-pin preset  
timer 1 (Counter)  
24-frame signals  
30-frame signals  
after pulldown  
conversion  
Input and Output Signals in 24P  
(23.98P) Mode  
9-pin scene  
timecode  
24-frame timecode 30-frame timecode  
after pulldown  
The following tables show the signals input and output by  
the unit when “23.98PsF” and “2-3 PULL DOWN” are  
selected.  
conversion  
9-pin scene  
timer 1 (Counter)  
24-frame signals  
30-frame signals  
after pulldown  
conversion  
Input and output signals  
For more information about remote timecode mode, refer  
to the REMOTE (9-pin) Protocol Manual for the PDW  
series (not supplied).  
I/O  
Type  
23.98PsF  
2-3 PULL  
DOWN  
Input  
signals  
Reference  
video input  
23.98PsF  
reference signal reference signal  
59.94i  
Recording in 24P (23.98P) Mode  
HDSDI input 23.98PsF video and audio  
signals  
Input  
timecode  
LTC input  
24-frame timecode  
Recording frame sequence and clip length  
HDSDI LTC  
input  
See the following figure for the frame sequence.  
Output  
signals  
HDSDI  
output  
23.98PsF video Video and  
and audio  
signals  
audio signals  
pulled down to  
59.94i  
In 24P (23.98P) mode, recording start and stop timing is  
adjusted so that a recorded sequence always begins with an  
“A-frame” and ends with a “D-frame”. As a result, the  
number of frames in a clip is always a multiple of 4.  
SDSDI output No output  
Composite  
output  
i.LINK DV  
output  
Recording timecode  
When you preset timecode manually, select a multiple of 4  
as the number of frames in the timecode, and adjust so that  
the preset timing begins with an “A-frame”.  
The unit will then adjust so that the timecode at the start of  
recorded clips will have a number of frames that is a  
multiple of 4.  
i.LINK TS  
output  
Timecode LTC output  
24-frame  
timecode  
30-frame  
timecode after  
pulldown  
output  
HDSDI LTC/  
VITC output  
conversion  
SDSDI  
RP188 LTC  
output  
Notes  
SDSDI VITC  
output  
• The above adjustments are not carried out when you  
preset timecode remotely.  
COMPOSITE –  
VITC output  
• No adjustments are made when you record external  
timecode. Therefore the number of frames in the  
38  
24P (23.98P) Mode Settings  
   
timecode at the start of recorded clips may not have a  
number of frames that is a multiple of 4. If you want to  
make sure that the number of frames in the timecode of  
the first frames of recorded clips is a multiple of 4, set the  
run mode to “REC RUN”, and record after manually  
presetting the timecode.  
Playback in 24P (23.98P) 2-3 Pulldown Mode  
frame timecode and 10:00:00:00 has been set for the 30-  
frame timecode.  
Pulldown playback frame sequences  
During pulldown mode playback, playback is carried out  
so that the 24-frame timecode set with TIME CODE >PD  
PRESET in the setup menu becomes the “A-frame” of the  
frame sequence. The following figure shows the playback  
frame sequence when 01:00:00:00 has been set for the 24-  
Note  
This kind of frame sequence adjustment is not carried out  
for clip list playback.  
Timecode  
conversion  
reference  
24P: 1frame  
24P Video  
n-2  
00:59:59:22  
C-frame  
n-1  
00:59:59:23  
D-frame  
n
n+1  
01:00:00:01  
B-frame  
n+2  
01:00:00:02  
C-frame  
n+3  
01:00:00:03  
D-frame  
n+4  
01:00:00:04  
A-frame  
Frame Count  
TC (24F)  
Frame Seqence  
01:00:00:00  
A-frame  
60i: 1frame  
60i Pulldown Video  
TC (30F)  
09:59:59:28 09:59:59:29 10:00:00:00 10:00:00:01 10:00:00:02 10:00:00:03 10:00:00:04 10:00:00:05  
Timecode during playback of pulldown  
signals  
During playback of pulldown signals, timecode is  
converted to 30 frames to match the 59.94i video output  
signals.  
The values of “24F TC” and “30F TC” under TIME CODE  
>PD PRESET in the setup menu are used as the conversion  
references.  
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
TIME CODE  
DISC PROTECTION  
VIDEO CONTROL  
AUDIO CONTROL  
INTERFACE SELECT  
METADATA  
SETUP BANK OPERATION  
MENU GRADE  
: ENHAN  
To display 30-frame pulldown timecode in the  
monitor video display section or on an external  
monitor  
5
6
Press the ,/OUT button.  
1
Press the MENU button.  
The second level of the DISPLAY CONTROL menu  
appears.  
The system menu (see page 90) appears.  
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“DISPLAY INFO”.  
2
3
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
SETUP MENU.  
SETUP MENU  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
Press the ,/OUT button.  
CHARA.POSITION  
The setup menu appears.  
:WHITE  
:x1  
CHARA.TYPE  
CHARA.VSIZE  
DISPLAY INFO  
SUB STATUS  
MENU DISPLAY  
BRIGHTNESS  
ALARM  
4
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“DISPLAY CONTROL”.  
:T&STA  
:OFF  
:WHITE  
:55  
:ON  
:DIS  
:ALL  
MENU STATUS  
HD CHARA  
39  
24P (23.98P) Mode Settings  
 
7
Press the ,/OUT button.  
Superimposed Text  
Information  
The third level of the menu appears.  
SETUP MENU  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
:T&STA  
DISPLAY INFO  
* TIME DATA & STATUS  
TIME DATA & UB  
TIME DATA & CNT  
TIME DATA & TIME  
TIME DATA & CLIP  
TIME DATA ONLY  
The HDSDI signals output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1  
and 2 connectors and the MONITOR connector, the  
SDSDI signals output from the SDSDI OUTPUT  
connector, and the composite signals output from the  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT connector can contain  
superimposed text information, including timecode, menu  
settings, and alarm messages.  
8
9
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
To turn superimposed text on and off  
Set the CHAR SEL item on page P1 of the function menu.  
ON: Display superimposed text.  
OFF: Do not display superimposed text.  
LCD: Display superimposed text on the LCD panel of this  
unit, but do not display it on an external video monitor  
connected to this unit.  
“TIME DATA ONLY”.  
Press the SET button.  
The setting is confirmed.  
10Turn the display of character information on.  
To turn superimposed text on and off for selected  
outputs  
When CHAR SEL is set to “ON”, the settings of the setup  
menu items DISPLAY CONTROL >HD CHARA and  
DISPLAY CONTROL >SD CHARA (see page 97)  
determine whether superimposed text is output to the  
various output connectors.  
As shown below, you can display 24-frame timecode  
at the same time as 30-frame pulldown timecode.  
L T C  
P D T  
0 0  
0 0  
:
:
5 9  
5 9  
:
.
5 9  
5 9  
:
:
2 3  
2 8  
Output connector Text output modes selected by  
DISPLAY CONTROL >HD CHARA  
settings  
HDSDI2  
HDSDI OUTPUT 1 Off  
HDSDI OUTPUT 2 On  
MONITOR Off  
ALL  
On  
OFF  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Output connector Text output modes selected by  
DISPLAY CONTROL >SD CHARA  
settings  
SDI COMPOSITE  
ALL OFF  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT  
Adjusting the text display  
You can use the items in the DISPLAY CONTROL setup  
menu to specify the position, size, and type of  
superimposed characters.  
See page 95 for more information about the items in the  
DISPLAY CONTROL menu.  
40  
Superimposed Text Information  
           
c Timecode generator drop-frame mark (for system  
frequency 60I/30P only)  
“.”: Indicates drop-frame mode (factory default)  
“:”: Indicates non-drop-frame mode  
Information displayed  
1 Type of time data  
2 Timecode reader drop  
a)  
frame mark  
d VITC field mark  
“ ” (blank): Fields 1 and 3 (for system frequency 60I/30P)  
or fields 1, 3, 5 and 7 (for system frequency 50I/25P)  
“*”: Fields 2 and 4 (for system frequency 60I/30P) or  
fields 2, 4, 6 and 8 (for system frequency 50I/25P)  
3 Timecode generator drop  
a)  
frame mark  
Time data  
4 VITC field mark  
e Menu setting states  
This is displayed when the setup menu item DISPLAY  
CONTROL >MENU STATUS is set to “ENABLE” (see  
T C R  
0 0  
:
0 4  
.
4 7  
.
0 7 *  
P L A Y  
L O C K  
6 Operation mode  
Display  
Description  
B1  
The current menu settings are the same as the  
settings in menu bank 1.  
5 Menu setting states  
a) Only when the system frequency is 60I/30P.  
B2  
B3  
DF  
The current menu settings are the same as the  
settings in menu bank 2.  
Note  
The current menu settings are the same as the  
settings in menu bank 3.  
The display shown above corresponds to the factory  
default settings of the unit.  
You can use DISPLAY CONTROL >DISPLAY INFO  
(see page 96) in the setup menu to change the information  
shown in the second line.  
The current menu settings are the same as the  
factory defaults.  
No  
display  
The current menu settings are different from all  
of the above.  
f Operation mode  
more information about how to use the setup menu.  
The field is divided into two blocks as shown below.  
• Block A displays the operation mode.  
• Block B displays the servo lock status or playback speed.  
a Type of time data  
Display Meaning  
CNT  
TCR  
UBR  
TCR.  
UBR.  
TCG  
UBG  
IN  
Counter data  
TC reader timecode data  
TC reader user bits data  
VITC reader timecode  
VITC reader user bits data  
TC generator timecode  
TC generator user bits data  
In point time data  
B
A
Display  
Operation mode  
Block A  
Block B  
DISC OUT  
LOADING  
UNLOADING  
STANDBY OFF  
STOP  
Disc is not loaded.  
Disc is being loaded.  
Disc is being unloaded.  
Standby-off mode  
Stop mode  
OUT  
DUR  
Out point time data  
Duration between In point and Out point  
NEXT  
Cuing up to the first frame of  
the next clip.  
Note  
If the time data or user bits cannot be read correctly, they  
will be displayed with an asterisk. For example, “T*R”,  
“U*R”, “T*R.” or “U*R.”.  
PREV  
Cuing up to the first frame of  
the current clip.  
F.FWD  
F.REV  
PLAY  
Fast forward search  
Fast reverse search  
b Timecode reader drop-frame mark (for system  
frequency 60I/30P only)  
“.”: Indicates drop-frame mode  
Playback mode (servo  
unlocked)  
“:”: Indicates non-drop-frame mode  
41  
Superimposed Text Information  
Display  
Block A  
PLAY  
Operation mode  
Setting of menu item  
SUB STATUS  
Items of supplementary  
information displayed  
Block B  
CLIP NO  
Clip number  
LOCK  
Playback mode (servo  
locked)  
PLAYBACK REMAIN  
Time from the current playback  
position to the recording end  
position, displayed in time data  
format.  
REC  
Record mode (servo  
unlocked)  
REC  
JOG  
JOG  
LOCK  
STILL  
FWD  
Record mode (servo locked)  
A still picture in jog mode  
The following tables show the on-screen indications of  
supplementary information and their meaning.  
Jog mode in forward  
direction  
When the menu item SUB STATUS is set to “TC  
MODE”:  
JOG  
REV  
Jog mode in reverse  
direction  
On-screen  
indication  
Meaning  
SHUTTLE  
SHUTTLE  
VAR  
STILL  
A still picture in shuttle mode  
Shuttle mode  
(Speed)  
(Speed)  
INT PRST FREE  
The internal timecode generator is  
operating in FREE RUN mode.  
Variable speed mode  
TOP 0001/xxxx  
Cuing up to the first frame of  
the first clip.  
INT PRST REC  
The internal timecode generator is  
operating in REC RUN mode.  
END xxxx/xxxx  
Cuing up to the last frame of  
the last clip.  
INT REGEN-T&U The internal timecode generator is in  
synchronization with the playback  
timecode (LTC) read from disc.  
PREROLL  
C.REC  
Cuing up during preroll  
EXT LTC-T&U  
The internal timecode generator is in  
synchronization with the external  
timecode (LTC) input to the unit and is  
generating the same timecode values  
and user bit values as those of the  
external timecode (regeneration).  
Clip Continuous Rec mode  
(servo unlocked)  
C.REC  
LOCK  
Clip Continuous Rec mode  
(servo locked)  
C.REC-PAUSE  
Clip Continuous Rec mode  
(recording is being stopped)  
EXT VITC-T&U  
The internal timecode generator is in  
synchronization with VITC present in  
the external video signal input to the  
unit and is generating the same  
timecode values and user bit values as  
those of the external timecode  
(regeneration).  
Displaying Supplementary Status  
Information  
EXT DVIN-T&U  
The internal timecode generator is in  
synchronization with the external  
timecode input to the unit via the  
When you set the setup menu item DISPLAY CONTROL  
>SUB STATUS to other than “OFF” (see page 96), you  
can view supplementary status information on the monitor  
screen below the operating mode display area.  
S400 connector and is generating the  
same timecode values and user bit  
values as those of the external  
timecode (regeneration).  
.
.
T C R  
0 0  
P L A Y  
I N S  
:
0 4  
A 1  
4 7  
L O C K  
3 4 T C  
0 7  
EXT DVIN.V-T&U The internal timecode generator is in  
synchronization with the external VITC  
2
V
input to the unit via the S400  
connector interface and is generating  
the same timecode values and user bit  
values as those of the external  
timecode (regeneration).  
Supplementary status information  
The following items of supplementary status information  
are displayed depending on the setting of the menu item  
SUB STATUS.  
When the menu item SUB STATUS is set to  
“REMAIN”:  
Setting of menu item  
SUB STATUS  
Items of supplementary  
information displayed  
On-screen  
indication  
Meaning  
TC MODE  
Operating mode of the internal  
timecode generator  
REMAIN 120m  
298c (these  
numbers are  
examples of the  
indication)  
Remaining free capacity of the disc in  
minutes, and the number of new clips  
that can be recorded on the disc.  
When the time and number have not  
been detected, “REMAIN ---m ---c”  
appears.  
REMAIN  
Remaining free capacity of the  
disc in minutes, and the number of  
new clips that can be recorded on  
the disc.  
42  
Superimposed Text Information  
     
Recording and Playback  
3
Chapter  
• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the  
cartridge.  
• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage.  
• Do not disassemble the cartridge.  
Handling Discs  
• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for  
indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct position.  
Discs Used for Recording and  
Playback  
Storage  
• Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct  
sunlight, or in other places where the temperature or  
humidity is high.  
• Do not leave cartridges where dust may get inside.  
• Store cartridges in their cases.  
This unit can record and play back the following  
1)  
Professional Disc formats.  
• PFD23 (capacity 23.3 GB)  
• PFD23A (capacity 23.3 GB)  
• PFD50DLA (capacity 50.0 GB)  
Care of the discs  
• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using  
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
a soft dry cloth.  
• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry before  
use.  
Notes  
• It is not possible to use the following discs for recording  
or playback:  
- Blu-ray Disc  
- Professional Disc for Data  
Write-Protecting Discs  
• PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM devices  
with the DL mark (see the following illustration). They  
cannot be used by XDCAM devices without this mark.  
To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental  
erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of  
the disc in the direction of the arrow, as shown in the  
following figure.  
DL mark  
Notes on Handling  
Handling  
The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge, and is  
designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or  
fingerprints. However, if the cartridge is subjected to a  
severe shock, for example by dropping it, this can result in  
damage or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched, it  
may be impossible to record video/audio, or to play back  
the content recorded on the disc. The discs should be  
handled and stored carefully.  
43  
Handling Discs  
                       
To format a recorded disc, load the disc into the unit, then  
proceed as follows.  
Lower surface of the disc  
Write Inhibit tab  
Note  
When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the disc  
is erased. (Locked clips (see page 59) are also erased.)  
E
V
A
S
1 2,7 3,4,5  
EJECT  
F1  
Slide in the direction of the arrow  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
Write Inhibit tab settings  
F4  
F5  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
SAVE  
SAVE  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
Recording disabled  
Recording enabled  
You can also write protect individual clips. For details, see  
6
1
2
Press the DISPLAY button to maximize the monitor  
video section.  
Loading and Unloading a Disc  
Press the MENU button.  
When the on/standby switch indicator is lit green, you can  
load and unload a disc as shown in the following figure.  
The system menu appears on the display.  
On/standby switch and indicator  
3
4
Select “DISC MENU” using the M/MARK1 button or  
m/MARK2 button, then press the ,/OUT button.  
To unload  
Press the EJECT button.  
Select “FORMAT” using the m/MARK2 button, then  
press the ,/OUT button.  
The menu item QUICK FORMAT is selected.  
5
6
Press the ,/OUT button.  
The message “QUICK FORMAT OK?” appears.  
To cancel a disc format  
Press the RESET button to return to the state of step 3.  
To clear the menu from the screen, carry out step 7.  
To load  
Insert a disc face up.  
The disc is drawn in.  
Press the SET button.  
The format starts.  
The message “FORMAT COMPLETED.” appears  
when formatting of the disc is completed.  
The disc slot indicator flashes orange when you insert a  
disc, and lights blue when the disc is completely loaded.  
The indicator flashes blue when you eject a disc, and goes  
out when the disc is completely ejected.  
If you want to continue by formatting another disc  
When the message “FORMAT COMPLETED.”  
appears, press the EJECT button to eject the disc.  
Insert the next disc to format, and press the SET button  
when the message “QUICK FORMAT OK?” appears.  
Formatting a Disc  
Unused discs are formatted automatically when they are  
loaded into this unit.  
7
Press the MENU button to clear the menu from the  
screen.  
44  
Handling Discs  
             
(More data may be lost when the unit is subject to  
vibrations, and when you switch frequently between  
recording and paused.)  
• You are prompted to execute a full salvage every time  
you insert a disc that has not been salvaged, or power the  
unit on with such as disc loaded.  
• No recording is possible on discs containing clips that  
have not been salvaged, although it is possible to play  
back the normally recorded sections. Recording  
becomes possible if you perform a quick format, but this  
erases all of the original recorded content.  
Handling of Discs When Recording  
Does Not End Normally (Salvage  
Functions)  
Recording processing does not end normally if, for  
example, the POWER switch on the rear panel is turned off  
during recording, or if the power cord is disconnected  
during recording. Because the file system is not updated,  
video and audio data recorded in real time is not  
recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that  
point are lost.  
However, this unit has salvage functions which can hold  
losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such  
discs.  
There is a quick salvage function which executes  
automatically and a full salvage function which you can  
execute as required.  
To restore clips with a full salvage  
1
Insert the disc on which recording did not end  
normally.  
The message “Salvage ?” appears on the display.  
Quick salvage: Clips are reconstructed on the basis of  
backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and  
markers recorded on the disc. Processing time is about  
5 seconds.  
To cancel the clip salvage  
Press the RESET button.  
Quick salvage executes automatically if the unit is  
powered on with a disc still loaded after recording  
was interrupted by power off.  
Notes  
• The message “EJECT?” appears when “REC INH”  
is displayed in the operation modes section of the  
display. If the disc is write protected, eject the disc,  
set the Write Inhibit tab to enable recording, and  
then insert the disc again. If REC INH on page P1 of  
the function menu is set to “ON”, set it to “OFF” (see  
• This operation cannot be cancelled once it begins.  
• Before using another XDCAM device to perform  
a full salvage of a disc that was recorded  
Full salvage: Clips are reconstructed on the basis of  
markers recorded on the disc. Nonvolatile memory  
cannot be used, so processing takes longer than for a  
quick salvage (about 30 seconds, although it depends  
on the state of the disc).  
You are prompted to execute a full salvage whenever  
you insert a disc that was removed manually from a  
powered off device after interruption of recording by  
power off.  
1)  
successfully on the PDW-F75/75MD/F355/F335,  
check that the version of the other device is version  
1.7 or higher. Salvage cannot be completed  
successfully on version 1.6 or lower devices.  
Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the on/  
standby switch on the front panel is set to standby during  
recording, because the unit does not enter standby mode  
until after the end of recording processing.  
1) PDW-F350/F330, PDW-530/510, PDW-F70/F30, PDW-1500,  
PDW-R1, PDW-V1, PDW-D1, and PDW-70MD.  
Notes  
2
Press the SET button.  
• Even after recording finishes, do not set the POWER  
switch on the rear panel to off until the ACCESS  
indicator has gone out.  
Processing begins and the message “Executing.”  
appears.  
• These functions salvage as much recorded material as  
possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100%  
restoration cannot be guaranteed.  
• Even when these functions are used, it is not possible to  
recover data from immediately before the interruption of  
recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.  
Quick salvage: From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the  
interruption of recording.  
When processing finishes, a message appears to  
display the results.  
If the message reads “Incomplete!”, the clips that  
failed were lost.  
Full salvage: From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the  
interruption of recording.  
45  
Handling Discs  
           
Menu setting/display  
Video bit rate  
CBR 25 Mbps  
VBR 18 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
Recording  
SP  
LP  
a)  
DVCAM  
This section describes video and audio recording on the  
unit.  
a) Appears only when the PDBK-104 option board is installed.  
To set the audio recording format  
Set AUDIO CONTROL >REC MODE in the setup menu  
to one of the following.  
See page 88 “Function Menu” in Chapter 6 for more  
information about function menu operations.  
more information about setup menu operations.  
Menu setting Display  
Audio recording  
format  
2ch×16bit  
4ch×16bit  
2CH 16BIT  
4CH 16BIT  
2 channels/16 bits  
4 channels/16 bits  
Note  
It is not possible to combine material recorded in different  
system frequencies and audio recording formats on a  
single disc (although different bit rates may be combined).  
If you attempt to record material in a system frequency or  
audio recording format that differs from that of existing  
recorded material on the disc, “REC INH” appears on the  
display and recording is inhibited.  
Note  
When the video recording format is set to DVCAM, the  
audio recording format is always 4 channels/16 bits,  
regardless of the setting of this item.  
Recording Timecode and User Bit  
Values  
Make the following settings and adjustments before  
starting to record.  
Recording format settings: See the next section “To set  
the video and audio recording formats”.  
Video input signal selection: Select with V INPUT on the  
HOME page of the function menu.  
There are the following four ways of recording timecode:  
Internal Preset mode: This records the output of the  
internal timecode generator, set beforehand to an  
initial value. The following run modes can be  
selected.  
Audio input signal selection: Select with A1 INPUT to  
A4 INPUT on the HOME page of the function menu.  
Timecode and user bits settings: See “Recording  
Selection of time data to display: Select with CNTR SEL  
on page P1 of the function menu.  
Selection of audio channels to monitor: Select with  
MONI CH and MONI SEL on page P1 of the function  
menu.  
Volume adjustment of the monitor audio: Adjust with  
the LEVEL knob.  
Remote/local setting: Set the remote control switch. If  
you set it to REMOTE, also set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT >REMOTE I/F (“REMOTE”  
and the connector used appear on the display).  
• Free Run: Timecode advances continually.  
• Rec Run: Timecode advances only during  
recording.  
Internal Regen mode: This records the output of the  
internal timecode generator, initialized to timecode  
following continuously upon the timecode of the last  
frame of the last clip on the disc.  
External Regen mode: This records the output of the  
internal timecode generator, synchronized to an  
external timecode generator. As the external input, the  
timecode input to any of the following connectors can  
be selected.  
• TIME CODE IN connector: TC  
• HDSDI INPUT connector: LTC  
• SD SDI INPUT connector or COMPOSITE INPUT  
connector (when PDBK-104 is installed): VITC  
• SD SDI INPUT connector (when PDBK-104 is  
installed): LTC  
To set the video and audio recording  
formats  
External Preset mode: This directly records the input of  
an external timecode generator. As the external input,  
the timecode input to any of the TIME CODE IN  
connector can be selected.  
To set the video recording format  
Set the video bit rate (compression method) by setting  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >REC FORMAT in the  
setup menu to one of the following.  
Menu setting/display  
Video bit rate  
HQ  
VBR 35 Mbps  
46  
Recording  
         
6
Press the SET button.  
To record timecode after setting an initial  
value (Internal Preset)  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears, and the  
timecode set in step 5 is displayed.  
If RUN MODE on page P2 of the function menu is set  
to “FREE RUN”, timecode begins to advance from the  
initial value you just set.  
To set an initial value  
1 2 3,5 5 4,5  
To set timecode to the current time  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
1
2
Set RUN MODE on page P2 of the function menu to  
“FREE RUN”, and set DF/NDF to “DF”.  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
F5  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
Carry out steps 1 to 5 of the previous section “To  
Preset)” to set the timecode to a time slightly ahead of  
the current time.  
6
3
Press the SET button at the instant when the current  
time matches the displayed timecode.  
1
Make the following settings in the function menu.  
• Set CNTR SEL on page P1 to “TC”.  
• Set TCG on page P2 to “INT”.  
• Set TC MODE on page P2 to “PRESET”.  
To set user bits  
You can record up to eight hexadecimal digits of  
information (date, time, clip number, etc.) in the timecode  
track.  
2
3
Press the DISPLAY button to maximize the monitor  
video section.  
1
2
Set CNTR SEL on page P1 of the function menu to  
“UB”.  
Press the MENU button.  
The system menu appears on the display.  
Carry out steps 2 to 4 of the previous section “To  
4
Select “TC PRESET” using the M/MARK1 button or  
m/MARK2 button, then press the ,/OUT button.  
The TC PRESET MODE screen appears.  
The UB PRESET MODE screen appears.  
TC PRESET MODE  
UB PRESET MODE  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
UBG 00:00:00:00  
INC/DEC : ( )( )KEY  
SHIFT : ( )( )KEY  
CLEAR : RESET KEY  
INC/DEC : ( )( )KEY  
SHIFT : ( )( )KEY  
CLEAR : RESET KEY  
DATA SAVE :  
SET KEY  
DATA SAVE :  
SET KEY  
ABORT : MENU KEY  
ABORT : MENU KEY  
5
Use the arrow buttons and the RESET button to set the  
initial timecode value.  
3
Use the arrow buttons and the RESET button to set the  
user bits.  
</IN button or ,/OUT button: Select the digit to  
change (it flashes).  
</IN button or ,/OUT button: Select the digit to  
change (it flashes).  
M/MARK1 button or m/MARK2 button: Change  
M/MARK1 button or m/MARK2 button: Change  
the value of the selected digit.  
the value of the selected digit.  
RESET button: Reset all digits to 0.  
RESET button: Reset all digits to 0.  
To cancel the timecode setting  
Press the MENU button.  
Settings are made in hexadecimal (0, 1, 2,... 8, 9, A,  
B,... E, F).  
47  
Recording  
       
To cancel the user bits setting  
Press the MENU button.  
2
Make the following settings on page P2 of the function  
menu.  
• Set TCG to “SDI”.  
• Set TC MODE to “REGEN”.  
• Set TC/VITC to “TC”.  
4
Press the SET button.  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears, and the  
user bits set in step 3 are displayed.  
Synchronizing with multiplexed VITC input to the  
SD SDI INPUT or COMPOSITE INPUT connector  
(when the PDBK-104 is installed)  
To record timecode that follows  
sequentially upon the last recorded  
timecode (Internal Regen)  
You can record timecode so that it is continuous from one  
clip to the next on the disc.  
1
Connect a video signal containing multiplexed VITC  
to the SD SDI INPUT or COMPOSITE INPUT  
connector.  
Set TCG on page P2 of the function menu to “INT”, and  
TC MODE to “REGEN”. When this setting is in force, the  
unit reads the timecode of the last frame of the last  
recorded clip on the disc before starting to record, and  
internally generates timecode that follows upon the  
recorded timecode.  
2
Make the following settings on page P2 of the function  
menu.  
• Set TCG to “EXT”.  
• Set TC MODE to “REGEN”.  
• Set TC/VITC to “VITC”.  
In this case, the setting of DF/NDF on page P2 of the  
function menu is ignored. New timecode is recorded in the  
drop-frame mode of the last recorded timecode on the disc.  
Synchronizing with multiplexed SMPTE RP188  
LTC input to the SD SDI INPUT connector (when  
the PDBK-104 is installed)  
To record with the internal timecode  
generator synchronized to external  
timecode (External Regen)  
Use this method to synchronize the timecode generators of  
a number of recorders, to record the playback timecode of  
external VTRs, or to record while maintaining  
synchronization between the source video and timecode.  
Use either of the following procedures according to the  
type of external timecode.  
1
2
Connect a video signal containing multiplexed  
SMPTE RP188 LTC to the SD SDI INPUT connector.  
Make the following settings on page P2 of the function  
menu.  
• Set TCG to “SDI”.  
• Set TC MODE to “REGEN”.  
• Set TC/VITC to “TC”.  
Executing either of these procedures starts the internal  
timecode generator running in synchronization with the  
external timecode generator.  
Synchronizing with timecode input to the TIME  
CODE IN connector  
Once the internal timecode generator is synchronized with  
the external timecode generator, the internal timecode  
generator continues to run even if the external timecode  
generator connection is removed.  
1
Connect the timecode output of an external device to  
the TIME CODE IN connector, and input a reference  
video signal to the REF VIDEO INPUT connector.  
The timecode advance mode is set automatically to Free  
Run. The frame count mode (for system frequency 60I/30P  
only) is set to the same mode as the external timecode  
signal (drop-frame or non-drop-frame).  
2
Make the following settings on page P2 of the function  
menu.  
• Set TCG to “EXT”.  
• Set TC MODE to “REGEN”.  
• Set TC/VITC to “TC”.  
To check the synchronization to the external  
signal  
Synchronizing with multiplexed LTC input to the  
HDSDI INPUT connector  
Press the STOP button to stop this unit, then press the REC  
button.  
Check that the timecode value shown in the time data  
display coincides with the external timecode value.  
1
Connect an HDSDI signal containing multiplexed  
LTC to the HDSDI INPUT connector, and input a  
reference video signal to the REF VIDEO INPUT  
connector.  
48  
Recording  
   
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded is  
300. If the loaded disc already contains 300 clips,  
recording with the REC button is not possible. (The  
message “Max # Clips” appears in the time data display  
section.)  
To record external timecode directly  
(External Preset)  
When you use this method, the internal timecode generator  
advances without being affected by the external timecode.  
• During recording, do not turn off the POWER switch on  
the rear panel or disconnect the power cord. This could  
cause the clip being recorded to be lost. For details, see  
To directly record timecode input to the TIME  
CODE IN connector  
Connect the timecode output of an external device to the  
TIME CODE IN connector, and make the following  
settings on page P2 of the function menu.  
• Set TCG to “EXT”.  
• Set TC MODE to “PRESET”.  
• Set TC/VITC to “TC”.  
To specify the frame to use as the  
thumbnail image  
You can display a list of thumbnails of all clips on a disc,  
and use it to check the recorded content (see page 53).  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, it is set up to  
display the first frame of each clip as the thumbnail. As  
required, you can select another frame to display as the  
thumbnail.  
For example, if there are several seconds of color bars  
recorded at the start of the clip, selecting a frame after the  
end of the recording of color bars can make it easier to  
identify the clip.  
Carrying Out Recording  
One recording segment (from the start to the end of  
1)  
recording ) is called a “clip”.  
1) In recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function (see page 50) enabled,  
a clip is the segment recorded from the start of recording until the function  
is stopped or turned off.  
See Chapter 4 “Scene Selection” for more information  
about clips.  
You can use META DATA >INDEX POSITION in the  
setup menu to select the position of the thumbnail image  
by specifying a number of seconds after the first frame.  
The selection range is 0 seconds (0 SEC) to 10 seconds (10  
SEC).  
1
EJECT  
F1  
To adjust the audio recording levels  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
When carrying out audio recording at a reference  
level  
Set the VARIABLE switch to PRESET.  
The audio signals will be recorded at a preset reference  
level.  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
F5  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
You can change the reference level and the input levels  
with AUDIO CONTROL >LEVEL SELECT in the setup  
menu.  
REF LEVEL: Reference level  
CH1 IN LEVEL: Input level of channel 1  
CH2 IN LEVEL: Input level of channel 2  
3 2  
1
2
Insert a disc.  
Hold down the REC button, and press the PLAY  
button.  
Manually adjusting the audio recording levels  
Set the VARIABLE switch to “REC” and adjust the CH 1  
to CH 4 knobs so that the audio level indications on the  
audio level meters do not exceed 0 dB for a maximum  
volume. Carry out the adjustment in E-E mode.  
Recording starts.  
3
To stop recording, press the STOP button.  
If the disc becomes full  
Recording stops and the message “ALARM DISC END.”  
appears on the monitor.  
See OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >AUTO EE SELECT in  
the setup menu for more information about the signal  
output settings in E-E mode (page 94).  
Notes  
• The shortest clip that can be recorded is 2 seconds long.  
Even if recording start and stop operations are performed  
within 2 seconds, a 2-second clip is recorded.  
49  
Recording  
             
To set shot marks  
Recording operation  
A SHOT MARK1 essence mark or SHOT MARK2  
essence mark is set if you hold down the M/MARK1 or m/  
MARK2 button and press the SET button during  
recording.  
If the unit is set up to display superimposed text  
information (see page 40), “SHOTMARK1” or  
“SHOTMARK2” appears every time you set an essence  
mark.  
When SHOT MARK1 or SHOT MARK2 essence marks  
are set, you can search for the shot marks by displaying  
thumbnails of the frames at those positions (see page 56).  
You can also use shot mark positions as edit points during  
scene selection operations (see page 70).  
When a recordable disc is inserted, recording (or stop) is  
executed according to the REC (or STOP) command  
multiplexed into the HDSDI signals.  
Recording stops automatically when the end of the disc is  
reached.  
When HDSDI signals are interrupted during  
recording  
Recording stops if HDSDI signals are interrupted during  
recording, for example because the HDSDI cable is  
disconnected or the controlling camcorder is powered off.  
When HDSDI signal input is restored, the unit resumes  
operation according to the multiplexed REC or STOP  
command.  
You can also set shot marks during playback. See page 52  
for the procedure.  
Exchanging discs  
Even during recording, it is possible to eject discs by  
pressing the EJECT button on the front panel. After a disc  
is exchanged, the unit resumes operation according to the  
multiplexed REC or STOP command.  
Recording with the HDSDI Remote  
Control Function  
This section explains the settings required for recording in  
HDSDI remote control mode, and how the unit operates in  
this mode.  
Recording with the Clip Continuous  
Rec Function  
Normally, a clip is generated as an independent file every  
time recording starts and stops. The Clip Continuous Rec  
function allows you to continue recording to the same clip  
until the function is stopped or turned off, regardless of  
how many times recording starts and stops. This is  
convenient if you want to avoid generating a large number  
of short clips, or if you want to record without worrying  
about the limit on the number of clips (maximum 300). A  
REC START essence mark is recorded whenever  
recording starts, which makes it easy to find the recording  
start points.  
Note  
The unit (camcorder) that controls this unit must also  
support HDSDI remote output.  
Settings  
Set INTERFACE SELECT >REMOTE I/F in the setup  
menu to “HDSDI”, and set the remote control switch on  
the front panel to “REMOTE”.  
This unit enters HDSDI remote control mode, in which it  
is controlled by command packets received via the HDSDI  
INPUT connector.  
To enable the function  
Set OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >CLIP CONT. REC in  
the setup menu to “ON”.  
Note  
The following limitations apply in HDSDI remote control  
mode.  
• Commands received via the REMOTE(9P) connector  
are ignored.  
information about setup menu operations.  
• All of the controls on the front panel are disabled, except  
for the EJECT button.  
To record  
Connect a controlling device to the REMOTE(9P)  
connector of this unit and send a REC command.  
Monitor display in HDSDI remote control mode  
“REMOTE/HDSDI” appears in the operating mode  
display area (see page 18) of the monitor. This display  
lights if command packets are multiplexed into HDSDI  
signals, and flashes if they are not. However, the  
“REMOTE/HDSDI” continues to flash from the time the  
controlling camcorder is powered on until the time that the  
REC button is pressed on the camcorder.  
To stop recording  
Send a REC PAUSE command.  
To stop the function  
Do one of the following to stop the Clip Continuous Rec  
function. (A new clip will be generated the next time you  
start recording.)  
50  
Recording  
                     
• Perform a clip operation (lock or delete a clip)  
• Make a network or FAM connection  
• Eject the disc  
• Change the recording format (change the setting of  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >REC FORMAT in the  
setup menu, or change the setting of AUDIO  
CONTROL >REC MODE in the setup menu)  
• Power the unit off  
Playback  
This section describes playback of video and audio on the  
unit.  
Before starting playback, make the following settings and  
adjustments.  
Selection of time data to display: Select with CNTR SEL  
on page P1 of the function menu.  
Selection of audio channels to monitor: Select with  
MONI CH and MONI SEL on page P1 of the function  
menu.  
To turn the function off  
Set OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >CLIP CONT. REC in  
the setup menu to “OFF”.  
Volume adjustment of the monitor audio: Adjust with  
the LEVEL knob.  
Remote/local setting: Set the remote control switch. If  
you set it to REMOTE, also set the setup menu item  
INTERFACE SELECT >REMOTE I/F (“REMOTE”  
and the connector used appear on the display).  
Disc playback start position  
Although this unit uses optical discs, it is designed to offer  
the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs.  
One of these is the playback start position, which works in  
the same way as tape, as described below.  
After playback stop  
The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was  
pressed.  
Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the stop  
position.  
After recording  
The unit stops at the position where recording ended.  
To play back a clip, press the PREV button to move to the  
start frame of any clip or the previous REC START  
1)  
essence mark, or press the PREV button with the PLAY  
button held down to move to any position.  
1) The setting of OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >FIND MODE determines  
whether the unit jumps to clips or to REC START essence marks.  
When you play back clips recorded with the Clip Continuous Rec function  
(see page 50), you should set this menu item to “REC START EM”.  
After disc insertion  
The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most  
recently ejected.  
Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the most  
recent position.  
The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is  
ejected, which allows playback to start at that position  
whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player.  
51  
Playback  
       
To jump to the next or previous clip, then start  
playback  
Note  
This function is not available when the Write Inhibit tab of  
the disc is set to the recording disabled position, and when  
REC INH on page P1 of the function menu is set to “ON”.  
The REC INH indicator may light when neither of the  
above is true if the format of recorded sections on the disc  
is not the same as the recording settings of this unit. In this  
case, the playback position can be saved to the disc.  
Use the PREV button, NEXT button, jog dial, or shuttle  
dial.  
To stop playback  
Press the STOP button.  
If you play back to the end of the last clip, playback  
automatically stops.  
If, in this state, you press the PLAY button, the message  
“ALARM DISC END.” appears on the display.  
To carry out playback again, move back to the desired clip  
using the PREV button, jog dial or shuttle dial.  
Playback Operation  
This section describes the following types of playback:  
Normal playback: Playback at normal speed  
Playback in jog mode: Variable-speed playback, with the  
speed determined by the speed of turning the jog dial  
Playback in shuttle mode: Variable-speed playback, with  
the speed determined by the angular position of the  
shuttle dial  
To set shot marks  
While playing back a disc, you can set essence marks such  
as SHOT MARK1 and SHOT MARK2 in desired frames.  
To set a SHOT MARK1 or SHOT MARK2, hold down the  
M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button and press the SET  
button.  
Playback in variable-speed mode: Variable-speed  
playback, with the speed finely determined by the  
angular position of the shuttle dial  
To delete or change essence marks, use the supplied PDZ-  
1 Proxy Browsing Software. See “Using PDZ-1 Proxy  
Browsing Software” in Chapter 4 (page 79) for more  
information about installing the PDZ-1 software. See the  
online help of PDZ-1 for more information about using  
PDZ-1.  
Normal playback  
First insert a disc.  
You can delete SHOT MARK1 and SHOT MARK2 in the  
CHAPTER screen. For details, see “To delete shot marks  
For details of how to insert a disc, see “Loading and  
Playback in jog mode  
EJECT  
F1  
In jog mode, you can control the speed of playback by the  
speed of turning the jog dial. The playback speed range is  
–1 to +2 times normal speed.  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
F5  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
To carry out playback in jog mode, proceed as follows.  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
EJECT  
F1  
PREV button  
PLAY button  
NEXT button  
STOP button  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
F5  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
M/MARK1 button and m/MARK2 button  
Jog dial  
Shuttle dial  
1 2,3  
To start playback  
Press the PLAY button.  
Playback starts.  
When two or more clips are recorded on the disc, they are  
played back continuously.  
1
2
Press the JOG button, turning it on.  
Turn the jog dial in the desired direction, at the speed  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
Playback in jog mode starts.  
Note  
3
To stop playback in jog mode, stop turning the jog dial.  
No audio is output when non-audio signals are played  
back.  
52  
Playback  
             
Normally, the unit enters jog mode as soon as you turn  
the jog dial. If you want it to enter jog mode only when  
you press the JOG button, set OPERATIONAL  
FUNCTION >SEARCH ENABLE in the setup menu  
to “VIA SEARCH KEY”.  
1
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
ACCESS  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
MENU  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
LOCAL  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
Playback in shuttle mode  
In shuttle mode, you can control the speed of playback by  
the angular position of the shuttle dial. The range of  
playback speed is 20 times normal speed.  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
To carry out playback in shuttle mode, proceed as follows.  
3
2,3  
EJECT  
F1  
1
2
Press the VAR button, turning it on.  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
Turn the shuttle dial to the desired angle  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
F5  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
Playback in variable-speed mode starts.  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
3
To stop playback in variable-speed mode, return the  
shuttle dial to the center position, or press the STOP  
button.  
3 1 2,3  
1
2
Press the SHUTTLE button, turning it on.  
To alternate between normal-speed playback and  
variable-speed mode playback  
Set the shuttle dial to the position corresponding to the  
desired variable playback speed, then switch between  
normal-speed playback and variable-speed mode playback  
by pressing the PLAY and VAR buttons alternately.  
Turn the shuttle dial to the desired angle  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
Playback in shuttle mode starts.  
3
To stop playback in shuttle mode, return the shuttle  
dial to the center position, or press the STOP button.  
Searching for Clips with Thumbnails  
(Thumbnail Search)  
Normally, the unit enters shuttle mode as soon as you  
turn the shuttle dial.  
If you want it to enter shuttle mode only when you  
press the SHUTTLE button, set OPERATIONAL  
FUNCTION >SEARCH ENABLE in the setup menu  
to “VIA SEARCH KEY”.  
You can display thumbnail images (index pictures) of all  
clips on the disc, and use them to cue up a desired clip.  
To display a list of thumbnail images  
With the SUB CLIP button off, press the THUMBNAIL  
button, turning it on.  
A list appears showing thumbnails of 12 clips on the disc,  
including the clip being currently played back. (In the  
following description, this is referred to as the “thumbnail  
screen”.)  
To alternate between normal-speed playback and  
shuttle mode playback  
Set the shuttle dial to the position corresponding to the  
desired shuttle playback speed, then switch between  
normal-speed playback and shuttle playback by pressing  
the PLAY and SHUTTLE buttons alternately.  
Playback in variable-speed mode  
In variable-speed mode, you can control the speed of  
playback in the range of –1 to +2 times normal speed.  
To carry out playback in variable-speed mode, proceed as  
follows.  
53  
Playback  
                   
• Holding down the SHIFT button, press the M/  
MARK1 or m/MARK2 button: Display the previous  
or next page.  
Name of currently  
selected clip  
Sixth clip is selected from  
a total of 34 clips.  
a)  
Thumbnail (index picture) of  
currently selected clip  
2
Press the SET button or the PLAY button.  
b)  
If you press the SET button, a still image appears  
showing the first frame of the selected clip.  
If you press the PLAY button, playback starts from the  
first frame of the selected clip.  
Note  
The factory default setting for the clip thumbnail is  
such that the first frame of the clip is used as the  
thumbnail but you can change this setting so that any  
desired frame is used as the clip thumbnail (see “To  
54)). However, clip list playback always starts from  
the first frame, regardless of the thumbnail.  
Total length of selected clip  
Recording date and  
time of selected clip  
Clip information (recording date and time, initial timecode,  
total length, and so on)  
To change the clip information displayed in  
the thumbnail list  
With the thumbnail list displayed, proceed as follows.  
a) When a title has been assigned to a clip (see page 65), the title is enclosed  
in double quotation marks, for example “TITLE00001”.  
b) A mark is shown to indicate that the thumbnail (index picture) is not the  
first frame of the clip. (See “To change a thumbnail image (index  
1
2
3
Press the CLIP MENU (SHIFT + SUB CLIP) button  
or the MENU button to display the clip menu.  
To return to the original screen  
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning it off.  
In any of the following screens, you can press the  
THUMBNAIL button to return to the original screen.  
Press the M/MARK1 button or m/MARK2 button to  
select CLIP INFORMATION.  
Press the SET button.  
To select a thumbnail image and start  
playback  
A list of CLIP INFORMATION items appears.  
DATE: Date and time of recording  
TIME CODE: Timecode of the first frame in the clip  
DURATION: Recording time  
SEQUENCE NUMBER: Thumbnail sequence  
number  
2
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
(page 54) for more information about sequence  
thumbnail numbers.  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
F5  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
“TIME CODE” is selected when the unit is shipped  
from the factory.  
1
1 1  
1
4
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select an  
item that you want to display as part of the clip  
information, and then press the SET button.  
1
Do one of the following to select the thumbnail of the  
clip you want to cue up.  
The selected item is displayed as clip information  
under the thumbnail image.  
• Press the arrow buttons.  
• Turn the jog or shuttle dial.  
• Press the PREV or NEXT button: Move to the  
previous or next thumbnail.  
• Press the TOP (SHIFT + PREV) or END (SHIFT +  
NEXT) button: Move to the first or last thumbnail.  
To change a thumbnail image (index  
picture)  
With the thumbnail list displayed, proceed as follows.  
54  
Playback  
                   
1
2
Press the CLIP MENU (SHIFT + SUB CLIP) button  
or the MENU button to display the clip menu.  
Note  
When you press the SET button or the PLAY button  
after selecting a clip with this mark displayed, the clip  
is not cued up to the position of the thumbnail. It is  
always cued up to the first frame.  
Press the M/MARK1 button, m/MARK2 button , </  
IN button, or ,/OUT button to select SET INDEX  
PICTURE.  
3
4
Press the SET button.  
Searching with the Expand Function  
“SET INDEX” appears in the upper left of the screen.  
The expand function allows you to divide a selected clip  
into 12 blocks, and to display thumbnails of the first frame  
in each block in the thumbnail list. When the CHAPTER  
screen is visible, you can divide chapter segments between  
essence marks into 12 blocks and display thumbnails in the  
same way. This function is available whenever the  
thumbnail list or CHAPTER screen is displayed. This  
function allows you to quickly review the content of the  
selected clip or chapter, and to search efficiently for a  
target scene. You can repeat the expand operation up to  
three times  
Select the clip whose thumbnail you want to change  
(you can do this with the same operations as step 1 of  
5
Press the SET button.  
An enlargement of the current thumbnail image  
appears.  
(t 12 blocks t 144 blocks t 1,728 blocks).  
Note  
6
7
Press the PLAY button or use the jog or shuttle dial to  
play back the clip and display the frame that you want  
to use as the thumbnail image.  
The maximum number of blocks may be larger than 1,728  
when the recorded duration of the clip is short. In this case,  
the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1  
frame. This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at  
equal intervals.  
To cancel the thumbnail image change  
Press the RESET button.  
To execute the expand function  
Press the SET button.  
1
2
With the thumbnail list displayed, select the clip that  
contains the scene that you want to find.  
This returns you to the thumbnail list. The specified  
image appears as the thumbnail of the selected clip.  
A mark is shown to indicate that the thumbnail is not  
the first frame of the clip.  
Press the EXPAND (F5) button.  
The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks, and the first  
frame of each block appears in the thumbnail list.  
Mark indicating that the thumbnail is not the first frame  
Number of block  
55  
Playback  
       
3
As required, repeat step 2 once or twice.  
Essence marks not recorded on the disc are displayed  
in gray.  
Note  
To return to the thumbnail list screen  
Press the RESET button.  
Thumbnails cannot be further divided once their  
duration reaches 1 frame.  
To switch the thumbnail list between clip  
thumbnails and essence mark thumbnails  
With the thumbnail list displayed, press the DISPLAY  
button. Each press of the button switches the  
thumbnail list between display of clip thumbnails and  
display of thumbnails of frames with essence marks  
set.  
To return to the thumbnail list screen of the  
previous level  
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the EXPAND  
button.  
To return to the thumbnail list screen  
Press the RESET button.  
2
3
Press the PREV or NEXT button, or press the M/  
MARK1 button or m/MARK2 button, to select the  
desired essence mark.  
4
When you find the thumbnail of the target scene, press  
the SET button or the PLAY button.  
If you press the SET button, a still image appears  
showing the selected frame.  
If you press the PLAY button, playback starts from the  
selected frame.  
Press the SET button.  
A list appears showing the frames which contain the  
selected essence mark.  
Indicates that this is a list of  
frames containing the essence  
mark (SHOT MARK1)  
Sixth frame is selected from a  
total of 36 SHOT MARK1 frames  
Searching for Frames with Essence  
Marks  
Frame information (recording date and  
time, timecode, or total length)  
Proceed as follows.  
1 3  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
F5  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
Currently selected  
SHOT MARK1 frame  
2 2  
Recording date and time  
of the clip containing the  
selected frame  
Time from selected shot  
mark to next shot mark  
1
With the SUB CLIP button off, press the ESSENCE  
MARK (SHIFT + THUMBNAIL) button, turning it  
on.  
4
5
Select the thumbnail whose frame you want to cue up  
(you can do this with the same operations as step 1 of  
The essence mark selection screen appears.  
Press the SET button or the PLAY button.  
If you press the SET button, a still image appears  
showing selected essence mark frame.  
If you press the PLAY button, playback starts from the  
selected essence mark frame.  
56  
Playback  
       
To delete shot marks at chapter positions  
You can delete shot marks (SHOT MARK1 and SHOT  
MARK2) at chapter positions in the CHAPTER screen.  
(REC START essence marks cannot be deleted.)  
Searching with the Chapter Function  
When a clip contains shot marks, you can display them as  
chapter thumbnails.  
1
With the CHAPTER screen visible, press the CLIP  
MENU (SHIFT + SUB CLIP) button or MENU button  
to display the clip menu.  
See “To set shot marks” (page 50) about how to set shot  
marks.  
1
With the thumbnail list visible, select the thumbnail of  
the clip that contains the scenes you want.  
2
Select DELETE SHOT MARK.  
“DELETE SHOT MARK” appears in the upper left of  
the screen.  
An “S” mark appears in the upper right of clip  
thumbnails in the following cases.  
• When one or more shot marks have been set in the  
clip  
• When two or more REC START essence marks have  
been set in the clip  
3
4
Select the thumbnail image of the shot mark position  
to delete.  
Press the SET button.  
“S” mark  
A message appears, asking for confirmation of the  
deletion.  
5
Press OK to execute the deletion or CANCEL to  
cancel it, and then press the SET button.  
2
Press the CHAPTER (F4) button.  
Clip List Playback  
The CHAPTER screen appears, showing thumbnails  
of the frames where the shot marks are set.  
“S1” and “S2” marks on thumbnails indicate frames  
where SHOT MARK1 and SHOT MARK2 marks are  
set.  
You can play back clips in the same order as in a clip list  
created using the scene selection function.  
See Chapter 4 for more information about scene selection.  
Thumbnails without a mark are frames where REC  
START marks are set.  
Playing back in clip list order  
Proceed as follows.  
1
If the clip list that you want to play exists on the disc,  
load it into the current clip list.  
2
3
Press the SUB CLIP button, turning it on.  
Press the PLAY button.  
Playback begins from the first sub clip in the current  
clip list.  
3
4
Select the thumbnail whose frame you want to cue up  
(you can do this with the same operations as step 1 of  
Notes  
• Stop the unit before using the SUB CLIP button. Press  
the STOP button if a message appears telling you to stop  
the unit.  
• Depending on the length of sub clips in the clip list and  
their arrangement on the disc, playback may freeze  
momentarily between sub clips.  
Press the SET button or the PLAY button.  
If you press the SET button, a still image appears  
showing selected shot mark frame.  
If you press the PLAY button, playback starts from the  
selected shot mark frame.  
57  
Playback  
                   
To perform repeat playback, set OPERATIONAL  
FUNCTION >REPEAT MODE in the setup menu to  
“ON” (a REPEAT indicator appears in the display), and  
then proceed as follows.  
To cue up with sub clip thumbnail images  
With the desired clip list loaded in the current clip list,  
proceed as follows.  
1
Press the SUB CLIP button and the THUMBNAIL  
button, turning them on.  
1
Insert a disc.  
To perform repeat playback for normal playback,  
proceed to step 3.  
Thumbnails of the first frames in the sub clips appear.  
Sixth frame is selected from  
a total of 34 sub clips  
a)  
Name of current clip list  
2
3
To perform repeat playback for clip list playback, load  
a clip list into the current clip list and then press the  
SUB CLIP button.  
Sub clip information (date and  
time of creation, initial timecode,  
playback time)  
Press the PLAY button.  
Playback starts from the saved playback position.  
Normal playback: When playback of the last clip  
finishes, it resumes from the start of the disc,  
repeatedly playing from the first through the last  
clip on the disc.  
Clip list playback: When playback of the last sub clip  
finishes, it resumes from the start of the clip list,  
repeatedly playing from the first through the last  
sub clip in the clip list.  
Currently selected sub clip  
Repeat playback begins the unit is powered on if it is  
powered on with a disc loaded and OPERATIONAL  
FUNCTION >REPEAT MODE in the setup menu set to  
“ON”. Clip list playback starts from the first sub clip in the  
clip list.  
Recording date and time  
of clip list  
Total playback time of sub  
clips in the clip list  
a) When a title has been assigned to a clip list, the title is enclosed in double  
quotation marks, for example “SAKURA”.  
To start repeat playback from the device  
connected to the REMOTE (9P) connector  
Set OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >REPEAT MODE in  
the setup menu to “ON”, and then send the command to  
start repeat playback from the external device.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning it off.  
2
3
Select the thumbnail whose clip you want to cue up  
(you can do this with the same operations as step 1 of  
For details of commands, refer to the REMOTE (9-pin)  
Protocol Manual for the PDW series (not supplied).  
To stop repeat playback  
Do one of the following.  
Press the SET button or the PLAY button.  
• Set OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >REPEAT MODE in  
the setup menu to “OFF”.  
If you press the SET button, a still image appears  
showing the first frame of the selected sub clip.  
If you press the PLAY button, playback starts from the  
first frame of the selected sub clip.  
• Operate any of the playback buttons except the PLAY  
button, or operate the jog or shuttle dial.  
• From the external device connected to the REMOTE  
(9P) connector on this unit, send a command other than  
the repeat playback start command to this unit.  
Note  
In clip lists, the first frame of the sub clip (the In point  
frame) is always displayed as the thumbnail.  
Note  
The unit enters search mode when you conduct a search,  
and stop mode at the end of the disc.  
Repeat Playback  
You can perform repeat playback for normal and clip list  
playback.  
58  
Playback  
     
A lock confirmation screen appears. This screen  
displays clip names and clip titles.  
Locking (Write-Protecting) Clips  
In the thumbnail screen, you can lock them so that they  
cannot be deleted or altered.  
Locking prevents the following operations on clips.  
• Deletion  
To cancel the lock operation and return to the  
THUMBNAIL screen  
Select “CANCEL”, and then press the SET button.  
Press the RESET or MENU button.  
• Renaming by FAM or FTP  
• Changing the thumbnail image (index picture)  
• Adding and deleting shot marks  
5
With OK selected, press the SET button.  
You return to the thumbnail screen, and a lock icon  
appears on the thumbnail of the selected clip to show  
that it is locked.  
Notes  
• Locked clips are deleted along with other clips.  
• Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write  
Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled  
position, or when “REC INH” on page P1 of the  
function1 menu is set to “ON”.  
Lock icon  
1
With the SUB CLIP button off, press the  
THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
Locked clips cannot be deleted or set the thumbnail  
image (index picture) and so on. Unlock the clip if you  
want to perform any of these operations.  
The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.  
2
Select the clip to lock. (you can do this with the same  
operations as step 1 of “To select a thumbnail image  
To lock clips with a shortcut operation  
After carrying out step 2 in the procedure, press the STOP  
button with the SHIFT button held down (shortcut  
operation).  
Clip to be locked  
You can lock clips without displaying the CLIP MENU.  
To unlock clips  
Carry out step 2 of “Locking clips” to select a locked clip  
(one with the lock icon displayed on its thumbnail). Then  
do one of the following.  
• Carry out steps 3 and 4 of “Locking Clips”.  
• Press the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down  
(shortcut operation).  
To lock all clips  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
The CLIP menu appears.  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 3 of “Locking Clips” to display  
the CLIP MENU.  
Use the V/MARK1 or the v/MARK2 button to select  
LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS, and then press the  
b/OUT button.  
A submenu screen appears.  
3
4
Select “LOCK ALL CLIPS”, and then press the SET  
button.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
With “OK” selected, press the SET button.  
All clips are locked.  
Use the V/MARK1 or v/MARK2 button to select  
“LOCK/UNLOCK CLIP”, and then press the SET  
button.  
59  
Playback  
   
To unlock all clips  
Carry out the procedure in “To lock all clips”, selecting  
UNLOCK ALL CLIPS in step 2.  
• When the target clip is not referenced in a clip list:  
“DELETE CLIP?”  
• When the target clip is referenced in a clip list:  
“DELETE CLIP & CLIP LIST?” (The clip list that  
references the clip will also be deleted.)  
Deleting Clips  
You can delete selected clips while checking their content.  
Notes  
• Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the  
disc is set to the recording disabled position, or when  
“REC INH” on page P1 of the function menu is set to  
“ON”.  
• Locked clips cannot be deleted.  
To cancel the deletion and return to the CLIP  
MENU  
Select “CANCEL”, and then press the SET button.  
• When the target clip is referenced in a clip list, the clip  
list that references the clip will also be deleted.  
• If the deletion target clip is referenced by the current clip  
list, all of the referenced sub clips, and only those sub  
clips, are deleted simultaneously.  
Press the RESET or MENU button.  
5
Use the V/MARK1 button to select “OK”, and then  
press the SET button.  
1
With the SUB CLIP button off, press the  
THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
The clip is deleted and you return to the thumbnail  
screen.  
The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.  
To go to the clip deletion screen without  
displaying the CLIP MENU  
After step 2, press the RESET button with the SHIFT  
button held down (shortcut operation).  
The clip deletion screen appears directly, without  
displaying the CLIP MENU.  
2
Select the clip to delete. (You can do this with the same  
operations as step 1 of “To select a thumbnail image  
Clip to be deleted  
To delete all clips  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 3 of “Deleting Clips” to display  
the CLIP MENU.  
Use the V/MARK1 or the v/MARK2 buttons to select  
“LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS”, and then press  
the b/OUT button.  
A sub menu appears.  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
The CLIP menu appears.  
3
4
Select “DELETE ALL CLIPS”, and then press the  
SET button.  
A deletion confirmation screen appears.  
Use the V/MARK1 or the v/MARK2 button to select  
“DELETE CLIP”, and then press the SET button.  
To execute the deletion, use the V/MARK1 button to  
select “OK”, and then press the SET button.  
A deletion confirmation screen appears and then  
thumbnails of four frames (the first frame,  
intermediate frame 1, intermediate frame 2, and the  
last frame) in the target clip appear. At the same time,  
the clip name, title, date and time of creation, and  
duration appear.  
All clips are deleted.  
However, locked clips are not deleted.  
If all clips have been deleted, you return from the  
thumbnail screen to the original screen.  
One of the following messages appears, depending on  
whether the target clip is referenced in a clip list.  
60  
Playback  
   
Assigning Sequence Numbers to  
Thumbnails  
You can assign sequence numbers to displayed  
thumbnails.  
1
With the SUB CLIP button off, press the  
THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
Thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.  
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
The CLIP menu appears.  
Use the V/MARK1 button to select “CLIP  
INFORMATION”, and then press the SET button.  
A sub menu appears.  
4
Use the v/MARK2 button to select “SEQUENCE  
NUMBER”, and then press the SET button.  
As shown in the following figure, sequential numbers  
are assigned to thumbnails.  
61  
Playback  
   
Scene Selection  
4
Chapter  
Overview  
What is scene selection?  
Scene selection is a function which allows you to select  
material (clips) from the material recorded on a disc and  
perform cut editing. You can do this by operating on this  
unit only.  
• Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut  
editing in the field and in other offline situations.  
• With the scene selection function, you create clip lists  
(edit data). The clips themselves are not changed, so you  
can repeat the operation as often as you like.  
• Clip lists created with the scene selection function can be  
played back on this unit.  
• The scene selection function makes it easy to carry out  
operations such as adding material in clip units, adding  
parts of clips, adding by chapter, reordering the playback  
order, modifying In and Out points, and deletion, all on  
this unit.  
• Clip lists (edit data) created with the scene selection  
function can be used on XPRI and other full-feature  
nonlinear editing systems.  
62  
Overview  
       
Flow of scene selection editing  
Disc  
EJECT  
Record material or insert disc containing recorded  
material into this unit  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
ACCESS  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
MENU  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
LOCAL  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLA  
Y
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
SHIFT  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY  
PDW-F335/F355  
PDW-F75  
To edit a clip list on the disc  
Load a clip list (see page 77)  
Create and edit a clip list  
Sub  
Sub Sub  
Clip 1  
Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4  
• Including a sub clip in the current clip list (see page 67)  
• Reordering sub clips (see page 72)  
• Changing sub clip In and Out points (trimming) (see  
clip 1 clip 2 clip 3  
Select  
clips  
Clip list 1  
Recorded material  
• Deleting sub clips (see page 74)  
Clip 1  
Clip list 1  
Clip 2  
Clip 3  
Save the clip list to disc (see page 75)  
Disc  
Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3  
Play back clip list  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
ACCESS  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
Play back the clip list (see page 57)  
MENU  
F4  
F5  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLA  
Y
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
SHIFT  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY  
PDW-F75  
63  
Overview  
Clips  
Sub clips (clips in clip lists)  
Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called  
“clips”. A clip contains the material between a recording  
start point and a recording end point.  
The specified clips (or parts of clips) in a clip list are called  
“sub clips”. Sub clips are virtual data specifying ranges in  
the original clips. Clip data in the original clips is not  
overwritten. The following figure shows the relation  
between clips and sub clips.  
Clips have numbers beginning with C, for example C0001.  
Recording  
start point of Recording end  
Clips on disc  
clip 2  
point of clip 2  
Clip 1  
(C0001)  
Clip 3  
(C0003)  
Clip 4  
(C0004)  
Clip 2 (C0002)  
Clip 1  
(C0001)  
Clip 2  
(C0002)  
Clip 3  
(C0003)  
Clip 4  
(C0004)  
Clip list (E0001)  
Sub clip 1  
Sub clip 2  
Sub clip 3  
Clip number  
In the above example, the whole of clip 2 has been added  
as sub clip 1, and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub  
clip 2.  
Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3. Therefore, when clip list E0001  
is played back, clip 4 is played after clip 2, and then the  
part of clip 3 shown in gray color is played.  
Clip list editing (current clip list)  
To edit a clip lists, you need to load the clip from the disc  
into the internal unit memory.  
The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory  
is called the “current clip list”.  
The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation  
and editing. Clip list playback also uses the current clip  
list.  
Instead of using clip numbers, you can manage clips by  
assigning clip titles.  
Clip lists  
After creating and editing a clip list, you need to save it to  
disc.  
Data called a “clip list” is created when you use the scene  
selection function to select desired clips from the clips  
stored on a disc.  
Unit memory  
Clip lists have numbers beginning with E, for example  
E0001. Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc.  
Current clip list  
Can be edited (adding, deleting, and  
reordering sub clips)  
t Clip list playback  
and thumbnail  
display  
Clip list number  
SAVE Mm LOAD  
Disc  
C0001 (Clip 1)  
C0002 (Clip 2)  
E0001 (Clip list 1)  
E0002 (Clip list 2)  
C0003 (Clip 3)  
E0003 (Clip list 3)  
E0099 (Clip list 99)  
Clip list playback  
Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc.  
Clips are played back according to clip list data.  
Thumbnails of sub clips in the selected clip list  
64  
Overview  
       
CLIP AUTO TITLING  
Assigning Clip Titles  
When the setup menu item OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
>CLIP TITLE >AUTO TITLE (see page 94) is set to  
“ENABLE”, titles are displayed instead of clip numbers  
for all clips recorded after the setting is made.  
PREFIX  
NUMERIC  
_ TITLE  
_ 00001  
Clip title  
SHIFT: ( )( )( )( )KEY  
INC/DEC: JOG DIAL  
TO MENU: MENU KEY  
PREFIX: Prefix (up to 5 alphanumeric characters and  
symbols)  
NUMERIC: Initial value of the number (00001 to  
99999)  
2
3
Enter the prefix and initial number.  
To select the item to set and the character to set (it  
flashes): Use the arrow buttons.  
To select a character to enter at the selected  
position: Turn the jog dial.  
To return the settings to the factory defaults: Press  
the RESET button.  
Titles are made up of a prefix of up to 5 characters and a 5-  
digit number. The factory default prefix is “TITLE”, and  
the initial value of the number is 00001. Therefore, the title  
of the first clip created with the “ENABLE” setting is  
“TITLE00001”. The number is incremented for each  
subsequent clip.  
When you are finished entering the prefix and initial  
number, press the SET button.  
See “System Menu” (page 90) in Chapter 6 for more  
information about the setup menu.  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears, the title is  
saved, and the menu disappears from the screen.  
To switch to clip number display  
Set CLIP TITLE >AUTO TITLE to “DISABLE”.  
Clip numbers are displayed for all clips recorded after the  
setting is made.  
To clear the menu from the screen without saving a  
title  
Press the MENU button twice.  
Note  
Notes  
If you return the initial number to the default value after  
creating several clips, and then continue recording, clips  
with the same titles may be created.  
• Titles are displayed instead of clip numbers for clips that  
have titles.  
• Use the CLIP STATUS screen of the disc menu (see  
page 108) if you want to check the clip number of a clip  
that has a title.  
Assigning User-Defined Clip and  
Clip List Names  
To assign clip titles  
You can set the clip title prefix and the initial clip title  
number to arbitrary values.  
For example, if you set the prefix to “SCENE” and the  
initial number to 00100, the next clip to be created will  
have the title “SCENE-00100”.  
The following standard format names are assigned  
automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or  
recorded by XDCAM devices.  
Clips: C0001 to C0300  
Clip lists: E0001E01 to E0099E01  
You can use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software  
to assign user-defined names instead of the standard  
format names. You can assigned user-defined names  
instead of the standard format names. Assigning  
meaningful names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file  
management.  
1
Select OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >CLIP TITLE  
>TITLE in the setup menu, and then press the ,/  
OUT button.  
The CLIP AUTO TITLING screen appears.  
You can also use this unit's “AUTO TITLING” function to  
assign user-defined names to clips.  
65  
Overview  
           
To assign clip names on this unit  
The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name (file  
name).  
Note  
When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP TITLE  
menu is a space or period (.), the clip name is the title string  
minus the first letter.  
To enable clip and clip list renaming by FAM  
Carry out step 2 “To assign clip names on this unit”.  
It is now possible to write, transfer, and rename clips and  
clip lists with user-defined names over file access mode  
(FAM) connections (see page 83).  
To change clip names, execute the “Rename” command  
for a file in the Clip folder with the extension “.MXF”.  
The extension “.MXF” cannot be changed.  
C0001.MXF  
TITLE00001  
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to “C****”  
Fuji.MXF  
TITLE00001.MXF  
Clip renaming by FAM is enabled  
TITLE00001  
To change clip list names, execute the “Rename”  
command for a file in the Edit folder with the extension  
“. SMI”.  
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to “title”  
1
2
Set OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >CLIP TITLE  
>AUTO TITLE in the setup menu to “ENABLE” (see  
The extension “. SMI” cannot be changed.  
Set OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >FILE NAMING  
>AUTO NAMING to “free”.  
Sakura.SMI  
You are now able to use clips and clip lists with user-  
defined names.  
Clip list renaming by FAM is enabled  
To check clip names  
3
Set OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >FILE NAMING  
>AUTO NAMING to “title”.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen, and select the clip whose name you want to check.  
The name of the selected clip appears at the upper left of  
the screen.  
However, when a title has been assigned to a clip, display  
of the title takes priority. Titles are displayed enclosed in  
double quotation marks (“ ”).  
C****: Assign standard format clip names  
automatically.  
title: Assign clip titles as clip names.  
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
FILE NAMING  
more information about the thumbnail screen.  
.
AUTO NAMING title  
* C****  
title  
Note  
Clip names, clip list names, and titles are converted as  
follows for display in the thumbnail screen and the CLIP  
menu.  
• If the names are longer than 15 characters, only the first  
9 characters and the last 5 characters are displayed.  
Other characters are converted into s.  
The same name will now be given to newly recorded  
clips.  
• Lowercase characters are converted into uppercase.  
• Kanji and other multibyte characters, and some  
alphabetic symbols, are converted into s characters.  
66  
Overview  
Sequences of multiple s characters is converted into  
single s characters.  
The following alphabetic symbols can be displayed.  
: . ? ! # * / ( ) + - & @ = < > % " ; _  
Creating Clip Lists  
Select the desired clip, to include it in the current clip list  
as a sub clip.  
There are two ways to select clips.  
Display example  
JumpingDolphin_No103  
r
• Select from the thumbnail screen.  
JUMPINGDOsNO103  
You can select the desired clips from the thumbnail  
screen. You can also select continuous clips at a time.  
In addition, you can use the Expand function to specify  
a range to add in a clip or to load and add a clip with a  
chapter registered.  
• Select while playing back and searching.  
You can select the scene to use while viewing the video  
(quick scene selection).  
Before starting  
Insert a disc containing recorded clips into the unit.  
Including Clips Selected in the  
Thumbnail Screen in the Clip List  
SUB CLIP button  
CHAPTER button  
EXPAND button  
THUMBNAIL button  
MENU button  
SET button  
RESET button  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
ACCESS  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
MENU  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
LOCAL  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
SHIFT button  
PREV button  
PLAY button  
NEXT button  
STOP button  
Jog dial  
Arrow buttons  
(M/MARK1, m/  
MARK2, </IN,  
,/OUT button)  
Proceed as follows.  
1
With the SUB CLIP button unlit, press the  
THUMBNAIL button, lighting it.  
Thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.  
(In the following description, this is referred to as the  
“thumbnail screen”. )  
67  
Creating Clip Lists  
         
+NAME: Name of the clip list, or a user-defined name  
You can use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing  
Software to assign titles to clip lists.  
4
5
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select a  
clip list number such as E0001, and then press the SET  
button.  
This returns to the thumbnail screen.  
Press the SUB CLIP button.  
2
Press the MENU button.  
The clip list window appears.  
If you selected NEW FILE in step 4, the display shows  
the state with no clips loaded as shown below.  
Select NEW FILE to create a new clip list.  
The CLIP menu appears (see page 76).  
(If no clip list is loaded in the current clip list, a screen  
as shown in step 3 appears.)  
6
7
Press the MENU button.  
The CLIP menu appears.  
3
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
LOAD CLIP LIST, and then press the SET button.  
A clip list selection screen appears.  
For an already created clip list, the details including  
the creation date appear, and for an empty clip list,  
“NEW FILEappears.  
Display Item types  
Press the ,/OUT button to switch the display.  
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“ADD”, and then press the SET button.  
The scene selection window appears.  
(Subsequently, this entire screen is called the “scene  
selection window”.)  
To select the type of clip list information to display  
Press the ,/OUT button.  
Each press of the button switches the display in the  
order Date >Title >Name.  
The following informantion is displayed for display  
item types  
+DATE: Date and time when the clip list was created  
or last modified  
+TITLE: Title assigned to the clip list  
68  
Creating Clip Lists  
   
8
Use the arrow buttons or jog dial to select the desired  
clip.  
Total duration of sub clips in the current clip list  
You can also select clips with the following  
operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Moves to the  
previous or next clip.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Moves to the first or last clip.  
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button with the  
SHIFT button held down: Switches to the  
previous or next page. Does not switch when  
there is only one page.  
Press the </IN button or ,/OUT button with the  
SHIFT button held down: Selects continuous  
multiple clips.  
Cursor (shows insertion  
position of next sub clip)  
Thumbnails of the sub clips already added to the current clip list  
To display the total duration of the current clip list  
after the addition of the selected clips  
When you press the SHIFT button, the total duration  
of the selected clips is displayed, along with the total  
duration of the clip list after the addition of the selected  
clips. This allows you to check the new total duration  
before making the addition.  
12Repeat steps 8 to 11 until you have added all of the  
desired clips to the current clip list.  
You can add the same clip as a sub clip any number of  
times.  
13When you have finished selecting all the clips you  
want, press the SET button without pressing the  
SHIFT button.  
9
Press the SET button.  
An I-shaped cursor appears in the lower part of the  
scene selection window.  
Press the RESET button to return to the state of step 8.  
This closes the scene selection window, and the screen  
returns to the CLIP menu.  
To close the CLIP menu  
Press the RESET button.  
10Use the arrow buttons or jog dial to move the I-shaped  
cursor to the desired position.  
You can also move the I-shaped cursor with the  
following operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Moves the cursor  
to the previous or next sub clip.  
14Save the current clip list to disc.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Moves the cursor to the first  
or last sub clip.  
Press M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button: Moves to  
the 4th previous or 4th next sub clip.  
11With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET  
button.  
All the clips selected in step 8 are added to the current  
clip list as sub clips and the scene selection window  
shows thumbnails of registered sub clips.  
At the same time, the cursor disappears and you can  
select a new clip.  
Notes  
• Unless the current clip list has been saved to disc, its  
contents will be lost when the unit is powered off or the  
disc is ejected. After creating a clip list, be sure to save it.  
An asterisk (*) appears after the date and time of creation  
when a clip list has not been saved to disc.  
69  
Creating Clip Lists  
Note  
Even if you select several thumbnails, they are added to the  
clip list as one continuous sub clip.  
To add sub clips using the chapter  
function  
The chapter function allows a thumbnail to be displayed  
for each shot mark recorded within a clip.  
For details, see Chapter 3 “Searching for Frames with  
Asterisk appears when clip list has not been saved to disc.  
• Even when a clip whose thumbnail is not the first frame  
is added to a clip list, the thumbnail displayed in the clip  
list is always the first frame as a thumbnail.  
1
Carry out step 8 of the procedure in “Including Clips  
(page 67). An “S” mark appears in the upper right of  
thumbnails where short marks have been set. Select  
one of these thumbnails and press the CHAPTER  
button.  
To add sub clips using the expand function  
You can include a part of a sub clip in the current clip list  
by dividing the content of the sub clip into parts and  
displaying thumbnails of the parts.  
This displays thumbnails of chapters of the specified  
clip in the upper portion of the scene selection  
window.  
Proceed as follows.  
1
After carrying out step 8 of the procedure in  
the Clip List” (page 67), press the EXPAND (F5)  
button.  
Thumbnails of the target clip divided into eight equal  
parts appear in the upper portion of the scene selection  
window.  
2
3
Carry out steps 8 to 12 of the procedure in “Including  
List” (page 67) to include thumbnails of the scenes  
you want to include in the clip list.  
To vary the expansion ratio  
Each time you press the EXPAND button changes the  
ratio through the sequence ×8 t ×64 t ×512.  
To return to the previous setting, hold down the SHIFT  
button and press the EXPAND button.  
The section from the selected thumbnail to the next  
thumbnail is included as a sub clip.  
Save the current clip list to disc.  
To cancel the expand display  
Press the RESET button.  
You return to the scene selection window.  
When you select several chapter thumbnails, they are  
added to the clip list as a single sub clip.  
2
3
Carry out steps 8 to 12 of the procedure in “Including  
List” (page 67) to include thumbnails of the portions  
you want to include in the clip list.  
Quick Scene Selection (Adding Sub  
Clips during Recording, Playback, or  
Search)  
The section from the selected thumbnail to the next  
thumbnail is included as a sub clip.  
Save the current clip list to disc.  
Before starting, load the clip list to which you want to add  
a sub clip into the current clip list (see page 77).  
70  
Creating Clip Lists  
           
You can use a trimming operation (see page 73) to change  
In and Out points set by the quick scene selection function.  
To reset an In point or Out point  
With the </IN button or ,/OUT button held down,  
press the RESET button.  
4
Holding down the SHIFT button, press the SET  
button.  
2,3,4 2,3  
EJECT  
The section between the In point and Out point is  
added to the end of the current clip list as a sub clip.  
F1  
0
0
TCG  
EXT  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
TC MODE  
PRESET  
-30  
-40  
-60  
-30  
-40  
-60  
ACCESS  
RUN MODE  
REC RUN  
1
2
3
4
VAR  
MARK1  
+
NETWORK  
4CH 16 BIT  
3
4
T C / V I T C  
V I T C  
MENU  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
MPEG HD  
SP  
VITC  
1080 60I  
COOO1  
LOCAL  
REM:077M  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
P2  
00:00.00:00  
PAGE DISPLAY  
When you set In and Out points stretching across  
several clips  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
One sub clip is created for each of the clips.  
Clips recorded on the disc  
4
1
1
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
Clip 3  
1
With the SUB CLIP button off, and the clip displayed  
in full-screen mode, play back the clip or conduct a  
search to find the point that you want to set as the In  
point.  
In point  
Out point  
To display the desired clip in full-screen mode  
If the thumbnail screen is displayed, use the arrow  
buttons or jog dial to select the clip to display in full-  
screen mode, and then press the SET button.  
Sub clip 1  
Sub clip 2  
Sub clip 3  
5
6
Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you have added all of the clips  
you want to the current clip list.  
To search  
Use the jog and shuttle dials.  
Save the current clip list to disc.  
2
3
At the point you want to set as the In point, hold down  
the </IN button and press the SET button.  
An In point is set, and the IN indicator lights.  
If the unit is set up to superimpose character  
information on the display (see page 40), the In point  
timecode appears.  
In the same way, search for the point you want to set  
as the Out point, and then hold down the ,/OUT  
button and press the SET button.  
An Out point is set, and the OUT indicator lights.  
If the unit is set up to superimpose character  
information on the display (see page 40), the Out point  
timecode appears.  
To check the In point or Out point  
The timecode of the In or Out point that you have set  
appears when you press the </IN button or the ,/  
OUT button. An image of the In point is cued up if you  
hold down the </IN button and press the PREV  
button or NEXT button. An image of the Out point is  
cued up if you hold down the ,/OUT button and  
press the PREV button or NEXT button.  
To check the duration  
Hold down the </IN button and the ,/OUT button  
at the same time.  
The duration appears on the screen.  
71  
Creating Clip Lists  
You can also select clips with the following  
operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Moves to the  
previous or next clip.  
Editing Clip Lists  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Moves to the first or last clip.  
Press M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button with the  
SHIFT button held down: Switches to the  
previous or next page. Does not switch when  
there is only one page.  
Press an </IN button or ,/OUT button with the  
SHIFT button held down: Selects continuous  
multiple clips.  
You can select items from CLIP menus, and perform  
simple editing operations on clip lists and on sub clips  
registered in clip lists.  
Basic Operations  
1 3,5 2,4  
Note  
EJECT  
F1  
0
0
TCG  
EXT  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
TC MODE  
PRESET  
If you selected “TRIM”, you can select only one sub  
clip.  
-30  
-40  
-60  
-30  
-40  
-60  
ACCESS  
RUN MODE  
REC RUN  
1
2
3
4
VAR  
MARK1  
+
NETWORK  
4CH 16 BIT  
3
4
T C / V I T C  
V I T C  
MENU  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
MPEG HD  
SP  
VITC  
1080 60I  
COOO1  
LOCAL  
REM:077M  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
P2  
00:00.00:00  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
5
6
Press the SET button.  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
This allows you to carry out the editing operation  
selected from the CLIP menu for the selected sub clip.  
4
4
Carry out the selected editing operation.  
1
2
In the clip list screen, hold down the MENU button.  
For details, see the following pages.  
The CLIP menu appears.  
Reordering sub clips: Page 72  
Trimming sub clips: Page 73  
Deleting sub clips: Page 74  
Setting the timecode: Page 74  
7
Save the edited current clip list to disc.  
Reordering Sub Clips  
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
the edit item you want.  
Proceed as follows.  
You can carry out the following edit operations.  
1
Carry out steps 1 to 5 of the procedure in “Basic  
Operations” (see page 72) (select “MOVE” in step 2).  
CLIP menu Item  
MOVE  
Description  
Reorder sub clips.  
The I-shaped cursor indicating the move destination  
appears in the clip list window.  
TRIM  
Change the In and Out points of  
sub clips.  
2
Use the arrow buttons or jog dial to move the I-shaped  
cursor to the desired position.  
DELETE  
Delete unnecessary sub clips.  
TC PRESET  
Set the first timecode of the  
current clip list to any value.  
You can also move the cursor with the following  
operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Moves the cursor  
to the previous or next sub clip.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Moves the cursor to the first  
or last sub clip.  
3
4
Press the SET button.  
A screen appears to allow you to select the target sub  
clip of the operation. (A timecode setting screen  
appears if you have selected TC PRESET.)  
Press M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button with the  
Use the arrow buttons or jog dial to select the desired  
sub clip.  
SHIFT button held down: Switches to the  
72  
Editing Clip Lists  
             
previous or next page. Does not switch when  
there is only one page.  
Indicates that 2nd sub clip will be moved to position of 7th sub clip.  
To cancel the trim and return to the previous  
screen  
Press the m/MARK2 button to display “OK” (the  
background color changes into yellow), and press the  
RESET button.  
I-shaped cursor showing position to which selected  
sub clip will be moved.  
2
3
Carry out playback and search to find the new location  
of the In point or Out point of the selected sub clip.  
To return to the clip list window without moving  
any sub clip  
Press the RESET button.  
At the scene where you want to set a new In or Out  
point, hold down the </IN button (to change the In  
point) or the ,/OUT button (to change the Out point)  
and press the SET button.  
3
Press the SET button.  
The CLIP MENU appears after the sub clip order  
changes.  
If you press the SHIFT + SET buttons instead of the  
SET button, you return to the state after step 4 in  
“Basic Operations”, allowing you to move another sub  
clip.  
Depending on the button that you pressed, a new In or  
Out point is set.  
Note  
The IN and OUT indicators flash if you set an Out  
point with timecode smaller than the In point. If this  
occurs, set the correct timecode.  
To change both the In and Out points  
Carry out steps 2 and 3 for both the In and Out points.  
To reset the In or Out point  
Hold down the </IN button or ,/OUT button, and  
press the RESET button. The In or Out point is  
restored to the value it had before the sub clip trim  
screen opened.  
4
Save the current clip list to disc.  
To cue up the In or Out point  
The In point is cued up when you hold down the </  
IN button and press the PREV button or the NEXT  
button.  
The Out point is cued up when you hold down the ,/  
OUT button and press the PREV button or the NEXT  
button.  
Modifying the In and Out Points of  
Sub Clips (Trimming)  
Proceed as follows.  
4
5
Once you have set the new In point or Out point, press  
the m/MARK2 button to select “OK”.  
1
Carry out steps 1 to 5 of the procedure in “Basic  
Operations” (see page 72) (select TRIM in step 2).  
The background color of the OK button changes to  
yellow.  
The first frame (In point frame) of the selected sub clip  
appears. In this state, you can carry out playback and  
search all clips on the disc.  
Press the SET button.  
73  
Editing Clip Lists  
   
The CLIP MENU appears after the trim is executed.  
If you press the SHIFT + SET buttons instead of the  
SET button, you return to the state after step 4 in  
“Basic Operations”, allowing you execute another  
trim.  
By default, the start timecode (LTC) for the current clip list  
is set to “00:00:00:00”.  
To set this to a different value, proceed as follows.  
1
Carry out steps 1 to 4 of the procedure in “Basic  
Operations” (see page 72) (select TC PRESET in step  
6
Save the current clip list to disc.  
2).  
The timecode setting screen appears.  
Deleting Sub Clips  
Proceed as follows.  
1
Carry out steps 1 to 5 of the procedure in “Basic  
Operations” (see page 72) (select DELETE in step 2).  
To display the total duration of the current clip list  
after the addition of the selected clips  
When you press the SHIFT button, the total duration  
of the selected clips is displayed, along with the total  
duration of the clip list after the deletion of the selected  
clips. This allows you to check the new total duration  
before making the deletion.  
The timecode shown in this screen is the current initial  
timecode of the current clip list. If a clip list has been  
loaded from disc, and timecode has already been set  
for that clip list, then that value is displayed.  
2
3
Use the </IN and ,/OUT buttons to select the digit  
(HOUR, MIN, SEC or FRAME) you want to set.  
2
3
Press the SET button.  
Use the M/MARK1 and m/MARK2 buttons or jog dial  
to display the value you want to set.  
The deletion confirmation screen appears.  
To cancel the timecode setting  
Press the RESET button.  
To return to the clip list window without deleting  
any sub clip  
Press the RESET button.  
4
5
When you have finished setting all the digits you want,  
press the SET button.  
Use the </IN or ,/OUT button to select “OK”, and  
then press the SET button.  
The starting timecode for the current clip list is set to  
the specified LTC value. The count starts from that  
value when playback starts.  
The CLIP MENU appears after the deletion is  
executed.  
If you press the SHIFT + SET buttons instead of the  
SET button, you return to the state after step 4 in  
“Basic Operations”, allowing you to execute another  
deletion.  
Save the current clip list to disc.  
4
Save the current clip list to disc.  
The drop-frame or non-drop-frame setting of the current  
clip list reflects the setting of the unit at the time when one  
of the following operations is performed.  
• Adding the first sub clip  
• Setting the start timecode  
Setting the Start Timecode for the  
Current Clip List  
Previewing the Edited Clip List  
Continuous timecode is used in clip lists, regardless of the  
timecode of the parent clips of sub clips. Therefore, you  
can set the start timecode for each clip list.  
With the SUB CLIP button lit, press the PLAY button.  
If you are in the thumbnail screen (the THUMBNAIL  
button is lit), playback starts from the beginning of the  
selected sub clip.  
74  
Editing Clip Lists  
             
However, if you press the SUB CLIP button to turn it off,  
and then press it again to light it, the playback start position  
is reset to the start of the clip list.  
With the SUB CLIP button lit, press the PLAY button.  
You can repeat playback of the current clip list by setting  
SET UP >OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >REPEAT  
MODE to ON.  
Saving the Current Clip  
List to Disc  
Notes  
• Edited clip list data is not saved unless you carry out this  
operation. If you are going to use the created or edited  
clip list data later on, be sure to save it to disc.  
• If the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to the recording  
disabled position, you cannot save the current clip list to  
the disc.  
• It may not be possible to record because of some other  
reason, for example not enough free capacity on the disc.  
2 2,3  
EJECT  
F1  
0
0
TCG  
EXT  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
TC MODE  
PRESET  
-30  
-40  
-60  
-30  
-40  
-60  
ACCESS  
RUN MODE  
REC RUN  
1
2
3
4
VAR  
MARK1  
+
NETWORK  
4CH 16 BIT  
3
4
T C / V I T C  
V I T C  
MENU  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
MPEG HD  
SP  
VITC  
1080 60I  
COOO1  
LOCAL  
REM:077M  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
P2  
00:00.00:00  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
Proceed as follows.  
1
2
Display the CLIP menu.  
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to move the  
cursor to “SAVE CLIP LIST”, and then press the SET  
button.  
A list of clip lists appears. The date of creation or the  
title is displayed for each clip list.  
“NEW FILE” is displayed for clip lists without any  
saved data.  
To switch between title display and date of creation  
display  
Press the ,/OUT button.  
3
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button or jog dial to  
select the desired clip list, and then press the ,/OUT  
button.  
The current clip list is saved to disc.  
To cancel the save  
Press the MENU button.  
To assign a title to a clip list  
75  
Saving the Current Clip List to Disc  
   
Use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software.  
For details, see the PDZ-1 online help.  
Managing Clip Lists  
After you create or edit a clip list, you can use the CLIP  
menu to save it to disc, load it from disc into unit memory,  
and delete it from the disc.  
Displaying the CLIP menu  
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP  
button.  
In the thumbnail list screen and the clip list screen, you can  
display the CLIP menu by pressing the MENU button.  
The CLIP menu items you can display and select vary with  
the operating state of the unit (see the following table).  
Item  
Operation (reference page)  
CLIP INFORMATION  
Select the information displayed  
beneath thumbnails (see page  
LOAD CLIP LIST  
Load a clip list from the disc into  
the current clip list (see page  
SAVE CLIP LIST  
Save the current clip list to disc  
DELETE CLIP LIST  
SORT CLIP LISTS BY  
Delete a clip list from the disc  
You can sort the clip lists by  
name or date and time of  
creation (see page 77).  
a)  
Change the thumbnail image  
(index picture) of a clip (see  
SET INDEX PICTURE  
a)  
Add sub clips to the current clip  
ADD  
b)  
Reorder sub clips (see page 72)  
MOVE  
b)  
Change the In point or Out point  
of a sub clip (see page 73)  
TRIM  
b)  
Delete unnecessary sub clips  
DELETE  
b)  
Change the start timecode for  
the current clip list to a desired  
TC PRESET  
DELETE CLIP  
Delete a clip  
LOCK/UNLOCK CLIP  
Lock or unlock a clip  
LOCK OR DELETE ALL Lock or delete all clips  
CLIPS  
DELETE SHOT MARK  
Delete a shot mark  
a) Displayed only in operating thumbnail list screen  
b) Displayed only in operating the clip list screen  
To clear the CLIP menu from the screen  
Press the MENU button (or hold down the SHIFT button  
and press the SUB CLIP button).  
76  
Managing Clip Lists  
       
3
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select the  
desired clip list, and then press the SET button.  
Note  
The CLIP menu can handle up to 99 clip lists.  
The selected clip list is loaded into the unit as the  
current clip list.  
To display thumbnails of the loaded current clip  
list  
Press the THUMBNAIL button and SUB CLIP button,  
turning them on.  
Changing Displayed Items of  
Information on Sub Clips  
You can change information displayed in the lower portion  
of each thumbnail in the clip list window.  
Proceed as follows.  
If an unsaved clip list exists in current clip list  
memory  
A warning message like the following appears.  
“CLIP LIST IS NOT SAVED. OVERWRITE CLIP  
LIST?”  
Press the </IN button or ,/OUT button to select “OK”  
(overwrite) or “CANCEL” (do not overwrite), and then  
press the SET button.  
1
2
Display the CLIP menu.  
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“CLIP INFORMATION”, and then press the SET  
button.  
A screen appears allowing you to select information  
items to display.  
Deleting Clip Lists from a Disc  
Proceed as follows.  
3
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select the  
items you want to display, and then press the SET  
button.  
1
2
Display the CLIP menu (see page 77).  
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“DELETE CLIP LIST”, and then press the SET  
button.  
DATE: Date and time of creation  
TIME CODE: Timecode of the start of the sub clip  
DURATION: Playback time  
SEQUENCE NUMBER: Thumbnail sequence  
number  
A list of clip lists appears (see page 68).  
3
4
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select a  
(page 61) for more information about sequence  
thumbnail numbers.  
clip list to delete, and then press the SET button.  
A deletion confirmation screen appears.  
When the clip list window is displayed, the  
information of the selected items appears in the lower  
portion of each thumbnail.  
Press the </IN button or the ,/OUT button to select  
OK, and then press the SET button.  
To cancel the clip list deletion  
Press the RESET button.  
Loading a Clip List from a Disc Into  
the Current Clip List  
The selected clip list is deleted from the disc.  
To continue deleting other clip lists  
Before you can play back or edit a clip list, you need to  
load it from the disc into the current clip list.  
Proceed as follows.  
After selecting “OK”, press the SET button while holding  
down the SHIFT button. The selected clip list is deleted,  
and you return to step 3 and can continue deleting clip lists.  
1
2
Display the CLIP menu.  
Sorting Clip Lists  
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“LOAD CLIP LIST”, and then press the SET button.  
Proceed as follows to sort the list of existing clip lists by  
clip list name or by date of creation.  
A list of clip lists appears (see page 68).  
1
Display the CLIP menu.  
77  
Managing Clip Lists  
                 
You can jump to the first clip or last clip by pressing the  
PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT button held down.  
2
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
“SORT CLIP LISTS BY...”, and then press the SET  
button.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
3
4
Use the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select the  
type of sorting.  
NAME: Sort in ascending order by clip list name.  
DATE: Sort by date of creation, with the newest clip  
list first.  
Press the </IN button.  
Sorting starts on LOAD CLIP LIST screen and so on.  
Unused clip lists are excluded from the sort.  
If you selected “NAME”:  
BY NAME: Indicates sorting by name  
If you selected “DATE”:  
BY DATE: Indicates sorting by date  
78  
Managing Clip Lists  
Using the PDZ-1 Proxy  
Browsing Software  
When a computer with the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing  
Software installed is connected to this unit, you can  
transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on  
a disc to the computer. On the computer side, PDZ-1  
enables you to browse the proxy AV data, add or modify  
metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, etc.), or create  
a clip list.  
The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be  
written back to the disc loaded in this unit.  
System requirements to use the PDZ-1  
The following are required to use PDZ-1.  
• Computer: PC with Intel Pentium M CPU, at least 1 GHz  
(installed memory: at least 512 MB)  
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Professional  
SP2 or higher, Windows Vista Ultimate/Business  
(32bit), or Mac OS X v10.4.11 or higher  
• Web browser: Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 or higher  
• DirectX: DirectX 8.1b or higher  
To install PDZ-1  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM Application) into  
the CD-ROM drive of your computer, navigate to the  
PDZ-1 directory, and run the installer in the directory for  
your operating system.  
For details, refer to the ReadMe file on the CD-ROM.  
Note  
Make sure that the work folder to store the material  
transferred from this unit is on a hard disk drive with  
adequate free space. The amount of proxy AV data  
transferred is up to 2.8 GB per disc (when recording in the  
LP format).  
79  
Using the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software  
       
File Operations  
5
Chapter  
Overview  
root a)  
INDEX.XML  
A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used  
to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data  
files, such as video and audio data files.  
ALIAS.XML b)  
DISCMETA.XML  
Use FAM (file access mode) for the computer connection.  
MEDIAPRO.XML  
Clip  
Directory Structure  
C0001.MXF  
The following figure shows the directory structure of discs  
visible to a remote computer.  
C0001M01.XML  
C0002.MXF  
Note  
C0002M01.XML  
C0003.MXF  
This structure is not the same as the actual structure  
recorded on the disc.  
C0003M01.XML  
Edit  
E0001E01.SMI  
E0001M01.XML  
E0002E01.SMI  
E0002M01.XML  
Sub  
C0001S01.MXF  
C0002S01.MXF  
C0003S01.MXF  
General  
a) Root directory  
b) Only when sub item “NAMING FORM” on the SETUP  
>OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >FILE NAMING page is set to “free”  
80  
Overview  
           
File Operation Restrictions  
This section explains which operations are possible on  
files stored in each directory.  
Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the end of  
the file.  
When required, the following operation tables distinguish  
reading and writing from partial reading and writing.  
Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the file.  
Write: Write data sequentially from the start to the end of  
the file.  
Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only.  
Root directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
INDEX.XML  
ALIAS.XML  
Contains data for management Yes  
of the material on the disc.  
No  
No  
No  
No  
a)  
Contains conversion tables for Yes  
assigning user-defined names  
to clips and clip lists.  
No  
No  
No  
No  
b)  
DISCMETA.XML Contains metadata to indicate Yes  
the disc properties.  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
MEDIAPRO.XML Contains a list of material on  
the disc, basic properties,  
related information, and  
Yes  
information about access  
methods.  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) Only when sub item “NAMING FORM” on the SETUP  
>OPERATIONAL FUNCTION >FILE NAMING page is set to “free”  
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM  
Notes  
• Directories cannot be created in the root directory.  
• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub, and  
General) cannot be deleted or renamed.  
Clip directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
b) c)  
b)  
d)  
a)  
Clip file created by recording  
(MXF file)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*
C .MXF  
*: 0001 to 9999  
e)  
f)  
g)  
h)  
a)  
Metadata file generated  
automatically when C .MXF file  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
*
C M01.XML  
*
is created.  
*: 0001 to 9999  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) The unit can handle files with user-defined names in the “C*” part.  
b) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in a format matching  
the format (system frequency) and recording format (MPEG HD/DVCAM  
and number of audio channels) of the recorded sections of the disc, and  
which can be overwritten by XDCAM.  
h) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.  
Notes  
c) Overwriting is not possible  
• Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.  
• When the following operations are carried out on a disc,  
then it becomes impossible for version 1.4 and lower  
d) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording and  
“REC INH” is set to “OFF”. Any clip may be selected and deleted.  
e) Only files which can be written by XDCAM  
f) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is changed, a C*M01.XML  
file with the same name in the “C*” part is also changed automatically.  
g) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is created automatically.  
1)  
XDCAM devices to record new clips or delete existing  
81  
Overview  
 
clips on that disc. (The only possible operations are  
playback and disc formatting.)  
- Writing of clips with user-defined names  
- Deletion of clips (except the last recorded clip)  
- Locking of clips  
via a FAM connection, a Windows error message  
appears to the effect that the file or directory is corrupt  
and cannot be read.  
1) PDW-F350/F330, PDW-530/510, PDW-F70/F30, PDW-1500, PDW-R1,  
PDW-V1, PDW-D1, and PDW-70MD.  
• If you attempt to write a C*.MXF file which does not  
meet the conditions specified in remark b) to this table  
Edit directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
b)  
c)  
d)  
a)  
Clip list file  
*: 0001 to 0099  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*
E E01.SMI  
b)  
e)  
f)  
g)  
a)  
Metadata file generated  
automatically when E*E01.SMI  
file is created.  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
*
E M01.XML  
*: 0001 to 0099  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
a) The “E*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.  
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial writing is not  
possible.  
c) Only files which can be written by XDCAM  
d) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording and  
“REC INH” is set to “OFF”.  
e) When the “E*” part of a “E*01.SMI” file name is changed, an  
E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is also changed  
automatically.  
f) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML file with the same  
name in the “E*” part is also generated automatically.  
g) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, an E*M01.XML file with the same  
name in the “E*” part is also deleted automatically.  
Note  
Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.  
Sub directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
b)  
c)  
d)  
a)  
Proxy AV data (MXF) file  
generated automatically when  
a C*.MXF file is created.  
*: 0001 to 4999  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
*
C S01.MXF  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.  
Note  
b) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is changed, a C*S01.MXF file  
with the same name in the “C*” part is generated automatically.  
c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.XML file with the same name in  
the “C*” part is generated automatically.  
Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.  
d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.  
General directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
a)  
b)  
Any file  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length. (Depending on the  
character type, file names (including extension) may be limited to 21  
characters.)  
b) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording and  
“REC INH” is set to “OFF”.  
The following directory operations are possible in the  
General directory.  
• Directory creation (up to 64 levels, including the  
General directory)  
82  
Overview  
• Deletion and renaming of directories  
File Operations in File  
Access Mode (for  
Windows)  
Notes  
• The maximum number of files that can be created on one  
disc, including directories, is 6,000.  
• File names and directory names can use letters, numbers,  
and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8) character  
set.  
However, the following control characters and  
symbols cannot be used.  
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F  
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |  
File access mode operating environment  
Operating system requirements for file operations by file  
access mode are as follows.  
Computer operating system: Microsoft Windows XP  
Professional SP2 or higher, or Microsoft Windows Vista  
Ultimate/Business (32bit)  
1)  
1) The following character codes cannot be used by FAM connections.  
U+010000, U+020000, U+030000, U+040000, U+050000, U+060000,  
0U+70000, U+080000, U+090000, U+0A0000, U+0B0000, U+0C0000,  
U+0D0000, U+0E0000, U+0F0000, U+100000  
Preparations  
Do the following on the remote computer and this unit.  
• Install the FAM driver on the remote computer (see the  
next item).  
• In the setup menu, set INTERFACE SELECT >i.LINK  
MODE to “FAM (PC REMOTE)” (see page 103).  
To install the FAM driver  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM Application) into  
the CD-ROM drive of your computer, navigate to the FAM  
Driver directory, and run the installer in the directory for  
your operating system.  
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD-  
ROM disc.  
Making FAM Connections  
Proceed as follows.  
1
If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put the unit into the  
following state.  
• Recording, playback, search and other disc  
operations: Stopped  
• THUMBNAIL button (see page 16): Off  
• Disc access by DELETE LAST CLIP, DELETE  
ALL CLIPS, QUICK FORMAT in the DISC menu,  
and so on: Stopped  
• MENU button: OFF  
• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear  
2
Connect the S400 connector on this unit to the  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the remote  
computer, using an i.LINK cable.  
83  
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)  
               
File data  
Transfer of files  
Notes  
• If you power this unit off during an FAM  
connection, the data transferred thus far is discarded.  
• All file operations are not possible for some types of  
files.  
Disc recorder (this unit)  
Laptop computer, etc.  
F1  
F2  
F3  
ACCESS  
VCR  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MARK1  
MENU  
CLIP  
F4  
F5  
IN  
OUT  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
THUMB  
NAIL  
SET RESET  
EDIT  
81).  
JOG  
P
AGE DISPLA  
Y
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
CH-1  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
CH  
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
To eject discs from a remote computer  
Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer, and  
select “Eject” from the menu which appears.  
i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
Windows recognizes this unit as a removable disc, and  
displays one of the following icons on the remote  
computer’s task bar:  
To exit file operations  
Proceed as follows.  
• Windows XP:  
• Windows Vista:  
Note  
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3.  
The remote computer is now able to perform file  
operations when a disc is inserted into this unit.  
1
Do one of the following on the  
displayed in the remote computer’s taskbar.  
or  
icon  
When you make your first FAM connection  
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog appears when  
you connect this unit to your computer. Select “Install the  
software automatically (Recommended)”, and then click  
the Next button. Click the Finish button when the software  
installation finishes.  
• Double click.  
• Right click, and select “Safely Remove Hardware”  
from the menu which appears.  
The “Safety Remove Hardware” dialog box appears.  
Operation limitations during FAM connections  
• With the exception of the EJECT button, recording  
buttons and playback control buttons are disabled.  
• This unit cannot be controlled from any device  
connected to an external device connector.  
• There is no signal output from this unit, and the message  
“PC REMOTE!” appears in the display of this unit and  
on the external monitor.  
2
3
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-F75 IEEE 1394 SBP2  
Device” and click “Stop”.  
The “Stop a Hardware device” dialog appears.  
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-F75 IEEE 1394 SBP2  
Device” and click “OK”.  
In Windows XP, “Sony XDCAM PDW-F75 IEEE  
1394 SBP2 Device” is deleted from the list of  
“hardware devices”.  
In Windows Vista, the message “This device can be  
safely removed from your computer.” appears.  
Operating on Files  
Proceed as follows.  
This unit can now resume normal operations. (The  
limitations described in “Operation limitations during  
1
Start Explorer.  
Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit.  
(The drive letter will differ depending on the number  
of other peripherals connected to the remote  
computer.)  
4
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as required.  
To make a reconnection  
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one of the  
following, depending on whether an i.LINK cable is  
connected.  
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit and a  
remote computer with an i.LINK cable.  
2
Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc  
loaded in this unit.  
You can operate in the same way that you operate on  
local drives and files on network computers.  
i.LINK cable is connected: Disconnect the i.LINK cable  
from either this unit or the remote computer, wait for  
84  
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)  
         
at least 10 seconds, and then reconnect the  
disconnected cable.  
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is  
connected: Power the unit on.  
File Operations in File  
Access Mode (for  
Macintosh)  
To disable FAM connections  
Execute one of the procedures described in the previous  
connection between this unit and the remote computer. To  
disable FAM connections, in the setup menu, set  
INTERFACE SELECT >i.LINK MODE to “AV/C” (see  
File access mode operating environment  
Operating system requirements for file operations by file  
access mode are as follows.  
• Computer operating system: Mac OS X v10.4.11 or  
higher  
Preparations  
Do the following on the remote computer and this unit.  
• Install the FAM driver on the remote computer (see the  
next item).  
To install the FAM driver  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM Application) into  
the CD-ROM drive of your computer, and execute the  
FAM Driver >Mac >FAM Driver 1.1.1.dmg file, then  
follow the installation instructions.  
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD-  
ROM disc.  
To check the FAM driver version  
Connect this unit to your computer with an i.LINK cable,  
and then, with a disc loaded, start the system profiler utility  
of the application. The version appears to the right of  
“prodisk_fs” when you select “Advanced Functions”  
under “Software”.  
Making FAM Connections  
Proceed as follows.  
1
If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put the unit into the  
following state.  
• Recording, playback, search and other disc  
operations: Stopped  
• THUMBNAIL button: Off  
• Disc access by clip deletion, disc formatting, or  
other operation: Stopped  
• Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function:  
Off  
• MENU button: OFF  
• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear  
2
Connect the S400 connector on this unit to the  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the remote  
computer, using an i.LINK cable (see page 84).  
85  
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)  
     
When a disc is inserted into this unit, the remote  
computer recognizes this unit as a removable disc. The  
following icon appears in the Finder on the remote  
computer, indicating that the computer is now able to  
perform file operations.  
Note  
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 and  
2.  
1
Eject the disc by clicking the eject button to the right  
of the icon for this unit in the Finder, or by dragging  
the icon for this unit from the Finder to the Trash.  
2
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as required.  
Operation limitations during FAM connections  
• With the exception of the EJECT button, recording  
buttons and playback control buttons are disabled.  
• Do not use the EJECT button to eject discs. Always eject  
discs from the computer.  
• Do not disconnect the i.LINK cable during a FAM  
connection. Doing so may result in unstable operation.  
Always eject any loaded disc before disconnecting the  
i.LINK cable.  
To make a reconnection  
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one of the  
following, depending on whether an i.LINK cable is  
connected.  
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit and a  
remote computer with an i.LINK cable.  
i.LINK cable is connected: The unit is mounted  
automatically, so you do not need to do anything.  
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is  
connected: Power the unit on.  
Operating on Files  
Proceed as follows.  
1
2
Start the Finder.  
Check to be sure that a drive has been assigned to this  
unit.  
Operate from the Finder on the files on the disc in this  
unit.  
You can operate in the same way that you operate on  
local drives and files on network computers.  
Notes  
• If you power this unit off during an FAM  
connection, the data transferred thus far is discarded.  
• All file operations are not possible for some types of  
files.  
81).  
To eject discs from a remote computer  
Click the eject button to the right of the icon for this unit in  
the Finder, or drag the icon for this unit from the Finder to  
the Trash.  
Exiting File Operations  
Proceed as follows.  
86  
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)  
   
Recording Continuous  
Timecode over FAM  
Connections  
For clips created over a FAM connection, you can record  
so that the timecode is continuous with the timecode of the  
last frame of the last clip recorded on the disc.  
To record continuous timecode  
Before you start recording, set TCG on page P2 of the  
function menu to “INT” and set TC MODE to “REGEN”.  
Then write clip files to this unit from a connected computer  
or other device.  
87  
Recording Continuous Timecode over FAM Connections  
 
Menus  
6
Chapter  
To clear the function menu from the screen  
Press the DISPLAY button. The size of the monitor video  
section increases.  
Function Menu  
The function menu provides access to frequently used  
settings, such as input video signal selection and timecode  
settings.  
Menu settings are stored in nonvolatile memory and are  
preserved even after the unit is powered off.  
To change the setting of a function menu  
item  
Use the F1 to F5 buttons.  
Press the button to the right of each setting item to change  
the value of the item. Keep pressing the button until the  
value you want appears.  
Function Menu Operations  
Function Menu Settings  
The function menu appears on the LCD panel of this unit.  
The following figure shows the buttons used in function  
menu operations.  
The following tables list the setting items on each page and  
describe their setting values.  
Monitor video  
section  
HOME page  
F1  
0
0
TCG  
EXT  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
F2  
F3  
F4  
TC MODE  
PRESET  
-30  
-40  
-60  
-30  
-40  
-60  
Setting item  
Description  
RUN MODE  
REC RUN  
F1 to F5 buttons  
1
2
3
4
+
4CH 16 BIT  
3
4
T C / V I T C  
V I T C  
F1: V INPUT (video input) Selects the video input signal.  
HDSDI: HDSDI signal  
MPEG HD  
SP  
VITC  
1080 60I  
COOO1  
REM:077M  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
F5  
P2  
00:00.00:00  
SG: Test signal from the  
PAGE DISPLAY  
internal signal generator  
DISPLAY button  
PAGE button  
Display  
F2: A1 INPUT (audio input Selects the audio input signals  
1)  
F4: A3 INPUT (audio input and 3.  
3)  
assigned to audio channels 1  
Function Menu  
HDSDI: Audio signal  
multiplexed into HDSDI  
1)  
signal  
To display the function menu  
The function menu is made up of the HOME page and  
pages P1 and P2.  
If the function menu is not already visible, press the PAGE  
button to display it. (The most recently accessed function  
menu page appears.)  
The size of the monitor video section changes to the  
smallest size when the function menu appears.  
ANALOG1: Analog 1 audio  
signal  
AES/EBU: Signals input to  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/  
EBU) INPUT 1/2 and 3/4  
connectors  
SG: Test signal from the  
internal signal generator  
To display a different page  
Each press of the PAGE button displays the next function  
menu page in the order HOME t P1 t P2 t HOME…  
88  
Function Menu  
                         
Setting item  
F3: A2 INPUT (audio input Selects the audio input signals  
2) assigned to audio channels 2  
F5: A4 INPUT (audio input and 4.  
4) HDSDI: Audio signal  
Description  
Setting item  
Description  
F5: CHAR SEL (Character Turns the display of character  
information display)  
information in the monitor video  
section of the LCD panel and  
on an external monitor on and  
off.  
ON: Character information on  
OFF: Character information off  
LCD: Character information on  
for the LCD panel only  
When “ON” is selected, you  
can turn the superimposition of  
character information on and  
off for the various output  
connectors. To do so, set the  
setup menu items DISPLAY  
CONTROL >HD CHARA and  
DISPLAY CONTROL >SD  
CHARA (see page 97).  
multiplexed into HDSDI  
1)  
signal  
ANALOG2: Analog 2 audio  
signal  
AES/EBU: Signals input to  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/  
EBU) INPUT 1/2 and 3/4  
connectors  
SG: Test signal from the  
internal signal generator  
1) Only when HDSDI is selected as the video input.  
Note  
The signal name display flashes when the selected signal  
is not being input. Input the selected signal, or select  
another signal.  
Page P2  
Setting item  
Description  
F1: TCG (timecode  
Sets the operation of the  
internal timecode generator.  
INT (internal): The count value  
advances from a preset  
initial value, or advances  
consecutively from the  
timecode of the last frame  
recorded on the disc.  
EXT (external): Synchronize  
to the timecode input to the  
TIME CODE IN connector.  
SDI: Synchronize to the  
timecode of the signal  
input to the HDSDI  
Page P1  
generator)  
Setting item  
Description  
F1: CNTR SEL (counter  
Selects the time data to display  
in the time data display section.  
TC: Timecode  
UB: User bits  
COUNTER: Elapsed recording  
or playback time  
selection)  
F2: MONI CH (monitor  
Selects the audio channels to  
monitor.  
CH 1/2: Channels 1 and 2  
CH 3/4: Channels 3 and 4  
channel)  
connector.  
F3: MONI SEL (monitor  
Selects the audio monitor  
signal output from the AUDIO  
MONITOR connector and the  
PHONES jack.  
selection)  
STEREO: Assign the channels  
selected with MONI CH to  
left and right.  
MONO L (monaural L  
channel): Output one of  
the channels selected with  
MONI CH.  
MONO R (monaural R  
channel): Output one of  
the channels selected with  
MONI CH.  
MIX: Output monaural audio  
mixed from the channels  
selected with MONI CH.  
F4: REC INH (recording  
Turns recording inhibit mode  
on and off.  
inhibit)  
ON: Recording inhibit mode on  
OFF: Recording inhibit mode  
off  
89  
Function Menu  
       
Setting item  
Description  
System Menu  
F2: TC MODE (timecode  
When TCG is set to “INT”  
Selects whether the count  
value advances from a preset  
initial value, or advances  
consecutively from the  
timecode of the last frame  
recorded on the disc.  
PRESET: Advance from a  
preset initial value.  
mode)  
Use the system menu to set up the unit for specific  
purposes and conditions. Menu settings are stored in  
nonvolatile memory and are preserved even after the unit  
is powered off.  
REGEN (regenerate):  
Advance consecutively  
from the timecode of the  
last frame recorded on the  
disc.  
The system menu is made up of the following five menus.  
• Setup menu (SETUP MENU)  
• TC preset menu (TC PRESET)  
• Disc menu (DISC MENU)  
• Date and time preset menu (DATE/TIME PRESET)  
• Digital time display menu (HOURS METER)  
• History of most recent alarms (LAST ALARM)  
When TCG is set to “EXT”  
Selects whether to record  
timecode synchronized to  
external timecode from a  
preset initial value, or record  
the external timecode itself.  
PRESET: Record external  
timecode.  
REGEN (regenerate): Record  
timecode synchronized to  
external timecode from a  
preset initial value.  
This section explains the setup menu and the disc menu.  
value (Internal Preset)” in Chapter 3 for more information  
about the TC preset menu.  
more information about the date and time preset menu.  
Note  
When TCG is set to “SDI”, the  
external timecode itself is  
always recorded.  
for more information about the digital time display menu.  
F3: RUN MODE  
When TCG is set to “INT”, and  
TC MODE is set to “PRESET”,  
selects the run mode of the  
internal timecode generator.  
REC RUN: The timecode  
generator runs only during  
recording.  
FREE RUN: The timecode  
generator runs as long as  
the unit is powered on.  
See page 116 “Alarms” in the appendixes for the meaning  
of alarm messages and the actions to take when an alarm  
appears.  
Displaying the Setup and Disc  
Menus  
F4: TC/VITC  
Selects the type of timecode  
display in the time data display  
section (TC or VITC).  
Menus appear in the monitor video section and in the time  
data display section. If you have connected an external  
monitor, they are also superimposed over the picture  
shown on that monitor.  
F5: DF/NDF  
(only when the system  
Use this item to select drop-  
frame mode (DF) or non-drop-  
frequency is 60I/30P/24P frame mode (NDF).  
(pulldown))  
1
Press the MENU button.  
The system menu appears.  
SYSTEM MENU  
SETUP MENU  
TC PRESET  
DISC MENU  
DATE/TIME PRESET  
HOURS METER  
LAST ALARM  
90  
System Menu  
                     
The entire system menu appears in the monitor video  
section and on the external monitor.  
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
An uppercase and lowercase abbreviation of the  
selected line only (the line in reverse video) appears in  
the time data display section.  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
TIME CODE  
DISC PROTECTION  
VIDEO CONTROL  
AUDIO CONTROL  
INTERFACE SELECT  
METADATA  
2
3
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
SETUP MENU or DISC MENU.  
SETUP BANK OPERATION  
Press the ,/OUT button.  
:ENHAN  
MENU GRADE  
The setup menu (see page 93) or the disc menu (see  
page 107) appears.  
Setup Menu  
As shown in the following figure, the setup menu has three  
levels.  
The top level shows a general classification of the setting  
items in the menu. Except for MENU GRADE, the actual  
setting items are found on the second or third level.  
Setting items are divided into basic items, which are  
needed for normal operations, and enhanced items, which  
are needed for enhanced operations. In the figures, basic  
items are shown in bold characters.  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, the setup menu  
is configured to display all items. To hide enhanced items,  
change the setting of the MENU GRADE item.  
91  
System Menu  
       
Top level  
Second level  
Third level  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
REPEAT MODE  
SETUP MENU  
AUTO EE SELECT  
LOCAL ENABLE  
REC FORMAT  
DISC END  
DISC OUT  
F. FWD/REV  
STOP  
STANDBY OFF  
CLIP TITLE  
AUTO TITLE  
TITLE  
FILE NAMING  
SYSTEM SEL  
NAMING FORM  
AUTO NAMING  
SYSTEM FREQ  
UC/J SELECT  
23.9P OUTPUT  
SEARCH ENABLE  
VAR SPD LIMIT  
PREROLL TIME  
AFTER CUE-UP  
ASM POSTROLL  
CLIP CONT. REC  
FIND MODE  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
CHARA. POSITION  
CHARA. TYPE  
CHARA. VSIZE  
DISPLAY INFO  
SUB STATUS  
MENU DISPLAY  
BRIGHTNESS  
ALARM  
MENU STATUS  
HD CHARA  
SD CHARA  
TCG REGEN  
TIME CODE  
UB BINARY GP.  
VITC POS SEL-1  
VITC POS SEL-2  
EE OUT PHASE  
SEARCH MUTING  
PD PRESET  
VITC  
STILL TIMER  
DISC PROTECTION  
VIDEO CONTROL  
INT VIDEO SG  
BLANK LINE  
REFERENCE SEL  
SETUP REMOVE  
SETUP ADD  
CC(F1) BLANK  
CC(F2) BLANK  
WIDE MODE  
FRAME PB  
PROCESS CONTROL  
VIDEO GAIN  
CHROMA GAIN  
CHROMA PHASE  
SETUP LEVELa)  
HD SYNC PHAS  
SD SYNC PHAS  
OUTPUT SCH  
UP CONVERT  
AUTO SQUEEZE  
CONV MODE  
DETAIL GAIN  
DOWN CONVERT  
CONV MODE  
LETTER BOX  
H CROP POSIT  
DETAIL GAIN  
CROSS COLOR  
(Continued)  
92  
System Menu  
Top level  
Second level  
Third level  
AUDIO CONTROL  
REC MODE  
DATA MODE  
CH1/CH2 IN  
CH3/CH4 IN  
LEVEL SELECT  
INT AUDIO SG  
SHUTTLE MUTING  
EDIT POINT  
REF LEVEL  
CH1 IN LEVEL  
CH2 IN LEVEL  
OUTPUT LEVEL  
DV OUT MODE  
INTERFACE SELECT  
D-SUB OUTPUT  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
REMOTE I/F  
BAUDRATE  
i.LINK MODE  
NETWORK ENABLE  
WIRELESS RMT  
METADATA  
INDEX POSITION  
STORE OWNER  
UMID  
SDI OUT  
SD VANC LINE  
HD VANC LINE  
ESSENCE MARK  
HD VANC INPUT  
DATA ITEM OUT  
SDI OUT  
SD VANC LINE  
HD VANC LINE  
LINE  
DID  
SDID  
SETUP BANK OPERATION  
RECALL BANK1  
RECALL BANK2  
RECALL BANK3  
SAVE BANK 1  
SAVE BANK 2  
SAVE BANK 3  
MENU GRADE  
a) BLACK LEVEL when the system frequency is 50I/25P  
Setup Menu Items  
The purpose and settings of the setup menu items are  
described below.  
• An asterisk (*) (for example *EE) indicates that a setting  
is the factory default.  
• Brackets [ ] indicate characters and symbols that appear  
in the time data display section.  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION [Operational]: Operation  
settings  
Description  
REPEAT MODE [> REPEAT]: Determine whether or not to  
*OFF [>> OFF]: Do not put the unit into repeat playback mode.  
ON [>> ON]: Put the unit into repeat playback mode.  
put the unit into repeat playback mode.  
93  
System Menu  
       
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION [Operational]: Operation  
settings  
Description  
AUTO EE SELECT [> Auto  
EE]: Determine whether  
the unit enters E-E mode  
or PB mode when audio  
and video signals from  
DISC OUT [>> DISC OUT]:  
*EE [>>> EE]: Output video and audio signals received from  
other equipment.  
PB [>>> PB]: Suppress video and audio signals.  
When no disc is loaded.  
F.FWD/REV [>> F.FWD/  
EE [>>> EE]: Output video and audio signals received from  
REV]: Operations when  
other equipment.  
other equipment are input.  
in fast forward or rewind *PB [>>> PB]: Output playback video. Suppress audio signals.  
mode  
STOP [>> STOP]: Operations EE [>>> EE]: Output video and audio signals received from  
when in stop mode  
other equipment.  
*PB [>>> PB]: Output a still image.  
STANDBY OFF [>> STBY  
OFF]: Operations when  
in standby-off mode  
LOCAL ENABLE [> Local ENA]: Select the buttons that can ALL DISABLE [>> All DIS]: The EJECT button and the  
be operated on this unit even when the remote control  
switch is set to REMOTE.  
buttons in the recording/playback control block cannot be  
operated.  
*STOP & EJECT [>> STOP&EJ]: Only the STOP button and  
EJECT button can be operated.  
ALL ENABLE [>> All ENA]: The EJECT button and all of the  
buttons in the recording/playback control block can be  
operated. The preroll time can be set and time data can be  
selected on this unit.  
REC FORMAT [> REC format]: Select the recording format. HQ [>> HQ]: 35 Mbps  
*SP [>> SP]: 25 Mbps  
LP [>> LP]: 18 Mbps  
DVCAM [>> DVCAM]: 25 Mbps (only when PDBK-104 option  
board is installed)  
DISC END [> Disc End]: Select what the unit should do when GOTO TOP [>> GOTO TOP]: Move to the top of the disc.  
the free disc capacity is exhausted during recording.  
END STOP [>> END STOP]: Stop at the end of the disc.  
*EJECT [>> EJECT]: Eject the disc automatically.  
CLIP TITLE [> Clip Title]:  
Specify how to assign clip  
titles.  
AUTO TITLE [>> AT Title]:  
*DISABLE [>>> DISABLE]: Do not assign.  
Select whether to assign ENABLE [>>> ENABLE]: Assign.  
clip titles automatically.  
TITLE [>> Title]: Assign  
The CLIP AUTO TITLING screen appears.  
arbitrary titles.  
For details, see To assign clip titles” (page 65) in Chapter 4.  
FILE NAMING [> File Name: NAMING FORM [>> Name  
*C**** [>>> C****]: Standard format  
free [>>> free]: Enable free format.  
Specify the clip and clip  
list name format  
Form]: Specify the clip  
and clip list name format.  
AUTO NAMING [>> AT  
Naming]: Specify the  
format of the file names  
generated when clips are  
recorded.  
*C**** [>>> C****]: Standard format  
title [>>> title]: Assign the same name as clip title.  
SYSTEM SEL [> System  
Sel]: Select the system  
frequency and area of  
use.  
SYSTEM FREQ [>> Sys  
*60I [>>> 60i]: 59.94i  
Freq]: Select the system 50I [>>> 50i]: 50i  
frequency.  
30P [>>> 30P]: 29.97P  
25P [>>> 25P]: 25P  
23.98P [>>> 23.98P]: 23.98P  
Note  
UC/J SELECT [>> UC/J sel]: UC [>>> UC]: For areas outside Japan  
Select the area of use.  
*J [>>> J]: For Japan  
After changing any of the sub-  
items, press the on/standby  
switch to power the unit off  
(put it into standby), and then  
press it again to power the unit  
on. The initial settings of the  
setup menu as a whole will  
change to reflect the settings  
made here.  
23.9P OUTPUT [>> 23.9P  
*23.98PsF [>>> 23.9PsF]: Output as 23.98P.  
out]: Select the monitor 2-3 PULL DOWN [>>> 2-3PD]: Output after pulldown  
output when the  
SYSTEM FREQ is  
“23.98P”.  
conversion to 59.94i.  
94  
System Menu  
       
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION [Operational]: Operation  
settings  
Description  
SEARCH ENABLE [> Search ENA]: Specify how to put the  
*DIAL DIRECT [>> DIAL]: The unit switches to a search mode  
when you press the JOG, SHUTTLE, or VAR button, or  
when you turn the jog or shuttle dial (except during  
recording).  
unit into a search mode (jog, shuttle, or variable-speed).  
VIA SEARCH KEY [>> via KEY]: The unit switches to a  
search mode when you press the JOG, SHUTTLE, or VAR  
button.  
VAR SPD LIMIT [> VAR limit]: Specify whether to limit the  
*OFF [>> OFF]: –1 to +2 times normal speed  
ON [>> ON]: 0 to +1 times normal speed  
speed of variable speed playback  
PREROLL TIME [> Preroll]: Set the preroll time.  
15 SEC [>> 15 sec] to 0 SEC [>> 0 sec]: The preroll time can  
be set in one-second increments to between 0 and 15  
seconds.  
Factory default setting: 5 SEC [>> 5 sec]  
A preroll time of at least 5 seconds is recommended when  
using this unit for editing. When an editing control unit such as  
the BVE-700A has been connected, this setting is disabled and  
the setting on the editing control unit is in effect. Operations  
such as preroll time setting and time data switching are also  
performed on the editing control unit.  
AFTER CUE-UP [> After CUE]: Select the operating mode  
*STOP [>> STOP]: Stop mode  
STILL [>> STILL]: Output still pictures in search mode.  
following cue-up.  
ASM POSTROLL [> Postroll]: Specify whether to record  
OFF [>> OFF]: Do not record postroll.  
*ON [>> ON]: Record postroll.  
postroll when executing assemble editing  
CLIP CONT. REC [> C. CONT. REC]: Select whether to  
*OFF [>> OFF]: Disable Clip Continuous Rec.  
ON [>> ON]: Enable Clip Continuous Rec.  
enable the Clip Continuous Rec function.  
FIND MODE [> Find mode]: Specifies what to find when the *REC START EM [>> R.ST]: Jump to the next (when the  
NEXT or PREV button is pressed.  
NEXT button is pressed) or previous (when the PREV  
button is pressed) REC START essence mark.  
CLIP [>> Clip]: Jump to the first frame of the next (when the  
NEXT button is pressed) or previous (when the PREV  
button is pressed) clip.  
DISPLAY CONTROL [Display]: Settings related to display Description  
on the LCD panel of this unit and on an external monitor  
CHARA. POSITION [> Chara pos]: Specify the position  
Make settings while viewing characters on the CHARA.  
where characters appear in the monitor video section and POSITION (character position) screen.  
on external monitors.  
To move characters up or down: Press the M/MARK1 or m/  
MARK2 button.  
To move characters left or right: Press the </IN or ,/OUT  
button.  
To return to the top level of the setup menu: Press the  
MENU button.  
CHARA. TYPE [> Chara type]: Select the type of characters Make settings while viewing characters on the CHARA. TYPE  
shown in the monitor video section and on an external  
monitor.  
(character type) screen.  
*WHITE (WITH BKGD): White characters on black  
background  
BLACK (WITH BKGD): Black characters on white background  
WHITE/OUTLINE: White characters with black outline  
BLACK/OUTLINE: Black characters with white outline  
To return to the top level of the setup menu: Press the  
MENU button.  
CHARA. VSIZE [> Chara size]: Specify the vertical size of  
Specify while viewing the display on the CHARA. VSIZE  
character information in the monitor video section and on (character vertical size) screen.  
an external monitor.  
*×1 [>> ×1]: Standard size  
×2 [>> ×2]: 2 times standard size  
To return to the top level of the setup menu: Press the  
MENU button.  
95  
System Menu  
     
DISPLAY CONTROL [Display]: Settings related to display Description  
on the LCD panel of this unit and on an external monitor  
DISPLAY INFO [> DISP info]: Select the content of the  
character information shown in the monitor video section  
and on an external monitor.  
*TIME DATA & STATUS [>> Time&STA]: Time data and the  
operating mode of the unit  
TIME DATA & UB [>> Time&UB]: Time data and user bits  
data. However, when user bits as time data is selected,  
user bits data and timecode are both displayed, in that  
order.  
TIME DATA & CNT [>> Time&CNT]: Time data and elapsed  
recording or playback time. However, when recording/  
playback time as time data is selected, recording/playback  
time and timecode are both displayed, in that order.  
TIME DATA & TIME [>> Time&Time]: Time data and VITC  
TIME DATA & CLIP [>> Time&Clip]: Time data and clip  
number  
TIME DATA ONLY [>> Time]: Time data only  
Time data is selected with CNTR SEL on page P1 of the  
function menu.  
SUB STATUS [> Sub status]: Select the supplementary  
*OFF [>> OFF]: No supplementary status information  
status information shown in the monitor video section and TC MODE [>> TC mode]: Indications of the operating mode of  
on an external monitor.  
internal timecode generator  
REMAIN [>> Remain]: Free capacity of the disc in minutes,  
and the number of new clips that can be recorded on the  
disc  
CLIP NO [>> Clp No]: Clip number  
PLAYBACK REMAIN [>> PB remain]: Time from the current  
playback position to the recording end position, displayed  
in time data format  
For details of supplementary status information displayed on  
the monitor when a setting other than OFF is selected, see  
Chapter 2.  
MENU DISPLAY [> Menu DISP]: Select the type of menu  
Select while viewing characters on the MENU DISPLAY  
characters shown in the monitor video section and on an screen.  
external monitor.  
*WHITE (WITH BKGD): White characters on black  
background  
BLACK (WITH BKGD): Black characters on white background  
WHITE/OUTLINE: White characters with black outline  
BLACK/OUTLINE: Black characters with white outline  
To return to the top level of the setup menu: Press the  
MENU button.  
BRIGHTNESS [> Brightness]: Adjust the brightness of the  
The LCD BRIGHTNESS screen appears.  
Factory default setting: *55  
display.  
more information about how to adjust the brightness.  
ALARM [> ALARM]: Select whether to display alarm  
OFF [>> OFF]: In general, do not display alarm messages.  
However, do display some important alarm messages.  
ON(LIMITED) [>> ON(Limit)]: Display a minimum number of  
alarm messages.  
messages.  
*ON [>> ON]: Display all alarm messages.  
MENU STATUS [> Menu STAT]: Select whether or not to  
*DISABLE [>> DISABLE]: Do not display.  
display menu settings in the monitor video section of the ENABLE [>> ENABLE]: Display (only when no disc is loaded  
LCD panel and on an external monitor when DISPLAY  
CONTROL >DISPLAY INFO is set to “TIME DATA &  
STATUS”.  
or during disc insertion/ejection).  
for the information that is displayed.  
96  
System Menu  
       
DISPLAY CONTROL [Display]: Settings related to display Description  
on the LCD panel of this unit and on an external monitor  
HD CHARA [> HD char]: Specifies the HD output  
connector(s) to which superimposed text information is  
output when CHAR SEL in page P1 of the function menu  
is set to “ON”.  
HDSDI2 [>> HDSDI2]: Superimposed text is output to the  
HDSDI OUTPUT 2 connector only. It is off for the HDSDI  
OUTPUT 1 and MONITOR connectors.  
*ALL [>> ALL]: Superimposed text is output to both of the  
HDSDI OUTPUT 1 and 2 connectors and to the MONITOR  
connector.  
OFF [>> OFF]: Superimposed text is off for both of the HDSDI  
OUTPUT 1 and 2 connectors and for the MONITOR  
connector.  
SD CHARA [> SD char]: Specifies the SD output  
connector(s) to which superimposed text information is  
output when CHAR SEL in page P1 of the function menu  
is set to “ON”.  
SDI [>>SDI]: Superimposed text is output to the SDSDI  
OUTPUT connector only. It is off for the COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT connector.  
COMPOSITE [>> COMP]: Superimposed text is output to the  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT connector only. It is off for the  
SDSDI OUTPUT connector.  
*ALL [>> ALL]: Superimposed text is output to both the  
SDSDI OUTPUT connector and the COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT connector.  
OFF [>> OFF]: Superimposed text is off for both the SDSDI  
OUTPUT connector and the COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
connector.  
TIME CODE [Time Code]: Settings related to the timecode Description  
generator  
TCG REGEN [> TCG regen]: Select the signals to generate *TC & UB [>> TC & UB]: Regenerate both timecode signals  
when the timecode generator is set to regenerate mode  
(TC MODE on page P2 of the function menu is set to  
“REGEN”).  
and user bits signals.  
TC [>> TC] :Regenerate timecode signals only.  
UB [>> UB]: Regenerate user bits signals only.  
UB BINARY GP. [> Binary Gp.]: Settings related to the user *000:NOT SPECIFIED [>> 000]: Character set not specified  
bits binary group flag.  
001:ISO CHARACTER [>> 001]: 8-bit characters conforming  
to ISO 646 and ISO 2022  
010:UNASSIGNED-1 [>> 010]: Undefined  
011:UNASSIGNED-2 [>> 011]: Undefined  
100:UNASSIGNED-3 [>> 100]: Undefined  
101:PAGE/LINE [>> 101]: Multiplex  
110:UNASSIGNED-4 [>> 110]: Undefined  
111:UNASSIGNED-5 [>> 111]: Undefined  
Note  
When TCG on page P2 of the function menu is set to anything  
other than “INT”, and TC MODE is set to “REGEN”, the user  
bits binary flag setting of external timecode is followed.  
VITC POS SEL-1 [> VITC pos-1]: Select a line to insert the  
When the system frequency is 60i, 23.98P or 30P  
20LINE [>> 20 line] to 12LINE [>> 12 line]: Select any line  
from 12 to 20.  
VITC in.  
Factory default setting: *16 LINE [>> 16 line] (line16)  
Note  
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two  
places, set both this item and VITC POS SEL-2.  
Note  
When the system frequency is 60i, 23.98P, or 30P, the VBID  
(Video Blanking ID) receives priority over a selection of  
“20LINE”.  
When the system frequency is 50i or 25P  
22LINE [>> 22 line] to 9LINE [>> 9 line]: Select any line from  
9 to 22.  
Factory default setting: *19 LINE [>> 19 line] (line 19)  
97  
System Menu  
     
TIME CODE [Time Code]: Settings related to the timecode Description  
generator  
VITC POS SEL-2 [> VITC pos-2]: Select a line to insert the  
When the system frequency is 60i, 23.98P or 30P  
VITC in.  
20LINE [>> 20 line] to 12LINE [>> 12 line]: Select any line  
from 12 to 20.  
Factory default setting: *18 LINE [>> 18 line] (line18)  
Note  
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two  
places, set both this item and VITC POS SEL-1.  
Note  
When the system frequency is 60i, 23.98P, or 30P, the VBID  
(Video Blanking ID) receives priority over a selection of  
“20LINE”.  
When the system frequency is 50i or 25P  
22LINE [>> 22 line] to 9LINE [>> 9 line]: Select any line from  
9 to 22.  
Factory default setting: *21 LINE [>> 21 line] (line 21)  
EE OUT PHASE [> EE out]: Determine the output phase for *MUTING [>> muting]: Suppress the output.  
the LTC signal output from the TIME CODE OUT  
connector when recording timecode and in STOP REC  
mode (forced E-E mode).  
THROUGH [>> through]: Output the timecode input to the  
TIME CODE IN connector as it is.  
VIDEO INPUT PHASE [>> V input]: Output the timecode with  
the same phase as the input video signal phase.  
VIDEO OUTPUT PHASE [>> V output]: Output the timecode  
with the same phase as the output video signal phase.  
SEARCH MUTING [> Srch muting]: Select whether to  
OFF [>> OFF] : Do not suppress.  
suppress the output from the TIME CODE OUT connector *ON [>> ON]: Suppress.  
in search (jog/shuttle) mode.  
PD PRESET [> PD preset]: Select the timecode to preset.  
The A-frames of pulldown sequences are preset. (This  
appears only when 24P (2-3 pulldown) is selected.)  
24F TC [>> 24F TC]: Timecode value that becomes the  
reference for A-frames.  
30F TC [>> 30F TC]: Pulldown value with respect to the above  
24-frame timecode.  
VITC [> VITC]: Specifies whether or not to record VITC  
generated by the internal timecode generator when  
recording DVCAM-format signals.  
OFF [>> OFF]: Do not record VITC.  
*ON [>> ON]: Record VITC.  
DISC PROTECTION [Disc protct]: Settings related to disc Description  
protection  
STILL TIMER [>> STL timer]: Specify the length of time the 0.5SEC [>>> 0.5 sec] to 30MIN [>>> 30 min]: Select time  
unit can be in still image mode before switching to disc  
protection mode.  
from 16 settings ranging from 0.5 second to 30 minutes.  
Factory default setting: *8MIN [>>> 8 min] (8 minutes)  
VIDEO CONTROL [Video]: Settings related to video  
control  
Description  
INT VIDEO SG [> Video  
SG]: Select the test  
signal to be output from  
the internal test signal  
generator. When you set  
V INPUT in the HOME  
page of the function  
menu to “SG”, the  
HD SIGNAL [>> HD Signal]: *100% COLOR BARS [>>> CB100]: 100% color bar signal  
Select the test signal for  
HD output.  
RAMP (Y/C) [>>> Ramp]: Bias signal  
GRAY [>>> Gray]: Grayscale signal  
BLACK [>>> Black]: Black signal  
SD SIGNAL [>> SD Signal]:  
Select the test signal for  
SD output.  
*100% COLOR BARS [>>> CB100]: 100% color bar signal  
BLACK BURST [>>> BB]: Black burst signal  
internal signal generator  
is activated and outputs  
the selected test signal.  
You can record this  
signal.  
98  
System Menu  
     
VIDEO CONTROL [Video]: Settings related to video  
control  
Description  
BLANK LINE [> Blank  
Line]: Switch blanking of  
the video output signal in  
the vertical blanking  
interval on or off. Lines in  
the vertical blanking  
interval can be set  
ALL LINE [>> All line]  
*- - - [>>> - - -]: Specify the blanking for each line separately.  
BLANK [>>> Blank]: Regardless of the setting of other sub-  
items, blank all lines which can be specified in this menu  
item.  
THROUGH [>>> Through]: Regardless of the setting of other  
sub-items, switch off blanking for all lines which can be  
specified in this menu item.  
separately The Y/C  
signal and odd/even  
fields are blanked  
When the  
system  
frequency is 60I  
or 30P  
(SYSTEM SEL [>> Line 19]  
>UC/JSELECT  
in the setup  
menu is set to  
“UC”)  
LINE12  
Specify blanking for lines 12 to 19.  
[>> Line 12] *BLANK [>>> Blank]: Carry out blanking.  
|
THROUGH [>>> Through]: Switch off blanking.  
simultaneously.  
LINE19  
LINE20  
Specify blanking for line 20.  
[>> Line 20] *BLANK [>>> Blank]: Carry out blanking.  
HALF [>>> Half]: Carry out half-blanking.  
THROUGH [>>> Through]: Switch off blanking.  
When the  
system  
frequency is 60I  
or 30P  
(SYSTEM SEL [>> Line 20]  
>UC/JSELECT  
in the setup  
menu is set to  
“J”)  
LINE12  
Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20.  
[>> Line 12] *BLANK [>>> Blank]: Carry out blanking.  
|
THROUGH [>>> Through]: Switch off blanking.  
LINE20  
LINE21  
Specify blanking for line 21.  
[>> Line 21] *BLANK [>>> Blank]: Carry out blanking.  
HALF [>>> Half]: Carry out half-blanking.  
THROUGH [>>> Through]: Switch off blanking.  
When the  
system  
frequency is 50I  
or 25P  
LINE9  
[>> Line 9]  
|
LINE22  
[>> Line 22]  
Specify blanking for lines 9 to 22.  
*BLANK [>>> Blank]: Carry out blanking.  
THROUGH [>>> Through]: Switch off blanking.  
LINE23  
Specify blanking for line 23.  
[>> Line 23] *HALF [>>> Half]: Carry out half-blanking.  
THROUGH [>>> Through]: Switch off blanking.  
REFERENCE SEL [> Ref Select]: Specify the signal to which AUTO [>> Auto]: Synchronize to the REF VIDEO input.  
the unit synchronizes during playback, when sync signals *INPUT [>> Input]: Synchronize to the HDSDI input.  
are input to both the HDSDI INPUT connector and the  
REF VIDEO INPUT connector.  
SETUP ADD [> Setup add]: Select whether to add black  
*OFF [>> OFF]: Do not add setup.  
ON (ADD) [>> ON]: Add setup.  
setup to the composite video output signal.  
CC (F1) BLANK [> CC1 blank]: Select whether to suppress *OFF [>> OFF]: Suppress.  
the closed caption signal to be superimposed on the 1st  
field of the output video signal.  
ON [>> ON]: Do not suppress.  
Note  
When you play back a disc with a recorded closed caption  
signal, the closed caption signal is multiplexed into SDSDI and  
composite output only.  
CC (F2) BLANK [> CC2 blank]: Select whether to suppress *OFF [>> OFF]: Suppress.  
the closed caption signal to be superimposed on the 2nd ON [>> ON]: Do not suppress.  
field of the output video signal.  
Note  
When you play back a disc with a recorded closed caption  
signal, the closed caption signal is multiplexed into SDSDI and  
composite output only.  
99  
System Menu  
VIDEO CONTROL [Video]: Settings related to video  
control  
Description  
WIDE MODE [> Wide  
INPUT [>> Input] (only when *AUTO [>>> Auto]: Automatically record wide picture  
mode]: For SD input and the PDBK-104 option board is  
information when it is detected in the selected input video  
signal.  
output, specify whether  
to record and play back  
with the addition of wide  
picture information.  
installed)  
OFF [>>> OFF]: Do not record wide picture information.  
ON [>>> ON]: Always record wide picture information.  
OUTPUT [>> Output]  
*AUTO [>>> Auto]: When DOWN CONVERT >CONV MODE  
in the setup menu is set to “SQUEEZE”, automatically add  
wide picture information when playing back MPEG HD-  
format video. When playing back DVCAM-format video,  
automatically add wide picture information if wide picture  
information is detected on the disc.  
OFF [>>> OFF]: Do not add wide picture information.  
ON [>>> ON]: Always add wide picture information.  
Notes  
To add wide picture information to the output signal, it is  
necessary, in addition to setting this item, to set line 20  
(when the system frequency is 60I, 30P) or line 23 (when the  
system frequency is 50I, 25P) to “THROUGH” in the VIDEO  
CONTROL >BLANK LINE item of the setup menu.  
• When the system frequency is 60I or 30P, the VITC signal is  
not output if the VITC insertion position has been set to  
“20LINE” with the setup menu items TIME CODE >VITC  
POS SEL-1/2.  
FRAME PB [> Frame PB]: Select whether to output fields or *AUTO [>> AUTO]: Output a field image when the format is  
frames as still images of video.  
interlaced, and output a frame image when the format is  
progressive.  
FRAME[>> FRAME]: Always output a frame image.  
PROCESS CONTROL  
[> Proc ctrl]: Separate  
adjustment screens  
appear for the following  
items. Use the jog dial to  
make settings, and press  
the MENU button to  
return from the  
VIDEO GAIN [>> V gain]:  
–848 [>>> –848] to 847 [>>> 847]  
Adjust the video output  
level.  
Factory default setting: *0 [>>> 0]  
CHROMA GAIN [>> C gain]: –848 [>>> –848] to 847 [>>> 847]  
Adjust the chroma output Factory default setting: *0 [>>> 0]  
level  
CHROMA PHASE [>> C  
–128 [>>> –128] to 127 [>>> 127]  
adjustment screens to  
the second level of the  
setup menu.  
phase]: Adjust the chroma Factory default setting: *0 [>>> 0]  
phase.  
SETUP LEVEL [>> Setup  
–272 [>>> –272] to 271 [>>> 271]  
Factory default setting: *0 [>>> 0]  
lev]: Adjust setup level.  
HD SYNC PHAS [>> HD S  
PHAS]: Adjust HD sync  
phase.  
–2200 [>>> –2200] to 2199 [>>> 2199] (system frequency:  
60i)  
–2640 [>>> –2640] to 2639 [>>> 2639] (system frequency:  
50i)  
–2750 [>>> –2750] to 2749 [>>> 2749] (system frequency:  
23.98P)  
Factory default setting: *0 [>>> 0]  
SD SYNC PHAS [>> SD S  
PHAS]: Adjust SD sync  
phase.  
–1716 [>>> –1716] to 1715 [>>> 1715] (system frequency:  
60i/23.98P)  
–1728 [>>> -1728] to 1727 [>>> 1727] (system frequency: 50i)  
Factory default setting: *0 [>>> 0]  
OUTPUT SCH [>>  
–512 [>>> –512] to 511 [>>> 511]  
OutputSCH]: Adjust the  
subcarrier H phase of  
composite video output.  
Factory default setting: *0 [>>> 0]  
Note  
Valid for serial number 11001 or higher and firmware version  
1.5 or higher.  
100  
System Menu  
VIDEO CONTROL [Video]: Settings related to video  
control  
Description  
UP CONVERT [> UP  
convert]: Specify  
upconvert output.  
AUTO SQUEEZE [>> Auto  
SQZ]: Select whether to  
use auto squeeze mode.  
*OFF [>>> OFF]: Do not use.  
ON [>>> ON]: Use.  
CONV MODE [>> Conv  
mode]: Select the  
conversion mode.  
*EDGE CROP [>>> Edge Crop]: Edge crop mode  
LETTER BOX [>>> LetterBox]: Letter box mode  
SQUEEZE [>>> Squeeze]: Squeeze mode  
DETAIL GAIN [>> Detail]:  
*LOW [>>> Low]: Low  
Select the gain level of the MID [>>> Mid]: Mid  
up converter image  
enhancer.  
HIGH [>>> High]: High  
DOWN CONVERT [> Down CONV MODE [>> Conv  
*EDGE CROP [>> Edge Crop]: Edge crop mode  
LETTER BOX [>> LetterBox]: Letter box mode  
SQUEEZE [>> Squeeze]: Squeeze mode  
conv]: Set up down  
mode]: Select the  
converter output.  
conversion mode.  
Note  
During recording, “SQUEEZE”  
(squeeze mode) is selected  
automatically for output from  
the i.LINK connector.  
LETTER BOX [>> LetterBox]: *16:9 [>> 16:9]: The aspect ratio of HD-SD converter output is  
Specify the aspect ratio of  
down converter output  
when “LETTER BOX” is  
selected under CONV  
MODE.  
16:9.  
14:9 [>> 14:9]: The aspect ratio of HD-SD converter output is  
14:9.  
13:9 [>> 13:9]: The aspect ratio of HD-SD converter output is  
13:9.  
Note  
When INTERFACE SELECT  
>i.LINK MODE in the setup  
menu is set to “AV/C”, the  
aspect ratio of output from the  
i.LINK connector is always  
16:9, regardless of the setting  
of this item.  
H CROP POSIT [>> H CROP]: Adjust with the jog dial.  
Adjust the H cropping (the To move the image to the left: Rotate the jog dial clockwise.  
sections cropped in the  
horizontal direction) in  
down converter output  
when “EDGE CROP” is  
selected under CONV  
MODE.  
To move the image to the right: Rotate the jog dial  
counterclockwise.  
DETAIL GAIN [>> Detail]:  
OFF [>> Off]: Off  
Select the gain level of the *LOW [>> Low]: Low  
down converter image  
enhancer.  
MID [>> Mid]: Mid  
HIGH [>> High]: High  
CROSS COLOR [>> Cross  
col]: Turn cross color  
adjustment on or off.  
*OFF [>> OFF]: The image enhancer uses default settings for  
cross color.  
ON [>> ON]: The image enhancer adjusts so that there are  
fewer cross colors.  
AUDIO CONTROL [Audio]: Settings related to audio  
control  
Description  
REC MODE [> REC mode]: Select the audio recording mode. *4ch×16bit [>> 4ch/16bit]: 4-channel, 48-kHz mode  
2ch×16bit [>> 2ch/16bit]: 2-channel, 48-kHz mode  
101  
System Menu  
   
AUDIO CONTROL [Audio]: Settings related to audio  
control  
Description  
DATA MODE [> Data mode]: CH1/CH2 IN [>> CH1/CH2]: *AUDIO [>>> Audio]: Handle as audio signals.  
Specify whether to handle  
digital audio signals as  
non-audio signals during  
recording.  
Specify for the input to  
the DIGITAL AUDIO  
(AES/EBU) 1/2  
DATA [>>> Data]: Handle as non-audio signals.  
connectors.  
CH3/CH4 IN [>> CH3/CH4]:  
Specify for the input to  
the DIGITAL AUDIO  
(AES/EBU) 3/4  
connectors.  
LEVEL SELECT  
[> Level Sel]  
REF LEVEL [>> REF Level]: *–20dB [>>> –20dB]  
Specify the reference  
level (headroom) for  
audio signals recorded to –12dB [>>> –12dB]  
–18dB [>>> –18dB]  
–16dB [>>> –16dB]  
disc.  
CH1 IN LEVEL [>> CH1  
*+4dB [>>> +4dB]  
input]: Select the audio 0dB [>>> 0dB]  
level setting according to –3dB [>>> –3dB]  
the audio level of the  
signal input to the AUDIO  
INPUT 1/3 connector.  
–6dB [>>> –6dB]  
CH2 IN LEVEL [>> CH2  
input]: Select the audio  
level setting according to  
the audio level of the  
signal input to the AUDIO  
INPUT 2/4 connector.  
OUTPUT LEVEL [>> Out  
Level]: Select the analog  
audio output reference  
level.  
INT AUDIO SG [> Audio SG]: Select the operation of the  
internal audio test signal generator. When you set A1  
INPUT to A4 INPUT in the HOME page of the function  
menu to “SG”, the internal signal generator is activated  
and outputs the selected test signal. You can record this  
signal.  
SILENCE [>> silence]: Silent signal  
*1kHz SINE [>> 1kHz]: 1-kHz, –20 dB FS sine wave signal  
SHUTTLE MUTING [> Shtl muting]: Set the audio muting  
*OFF [>> OFF]: Do not perform muting.  
ON [>> FULL]: Perform muting.  
conditions during shuttle playback.  
EDIT POINT [> Edit Point]: Specify the type of editing for  
CUT [>> Cut]: Cut editing (Discontinuity in audio signal may  
result at the editing point, causing noise during playback.)  
*FADE [>> Fade]: Fade in and fade out  
audio signals.  
IN  
OUT  
DV OUT MODE [> DV out mod]: Select the audio output  
4ch [>> 4ch]: 12 bit/32 kHz/4ch  
*2ch [>> 2ch]: 16 bit/48 kHz/2ch  
mode of the S400 connector.  
INTERFACE SELECT [Interface]: Settings related to  
interfaces  
Description  
D-SUB OUTPUT [> D-SUB Out]: Select the format of the  
XGA(SYSTEM) [>> XGA(SYS)]: Set to XGA monitor output  
(according to system frequency).  
signal output from the MONITOR connector.  
*XGA(60Hz) [>> XGA(60Hz)]: Set to XGA monitor output  
(fixed at 60 Hz).  
YPbPr [>> YPbPr]: Y/R–Y/B–Y component video signals  
102  
System Menu  
         
INTERFACE SELECT [Interface]: Settings related to  
interfaces  
Description  
AUDIO OUTPUT [> Audio Out]: Select the channels for audio *CH1/CH2 [>> CH1/CH2]: Output channel 1 to the AUDIO  
output from the AUDIO OUTPUT 1/3 and 2/4 connectors.  
OUTPUT 1/3 connector and channel 2 to the AUDIO  
OUTPUT 2/4 connector.  
CH3/CH4 [>> CH3/CH4]: Output channel 3 to the AUDIO  
OUTPUT 1/3 connector and channel 4 to the AUDIO  
OUTPUT 2/4 connector.  
REMOTE I/F [> Remote I/F]: Select how to perform remote  
control, when the remote control switch is set to  
REMOTE.  
i.LINK [>> i.LINK]: Use the S400 connector.  
*9PIN/RS-232C [>> 9P/232C]: Use either the REMOTE(9P)  
connector or the RS232C connector, depending on the  
setting of the remote connector selector switch.  
9PIN(PARA)[>> Para Run]: Use the REMOTE(9P) connector  
to connect several PDW-F75 units and perform remote  
control from one of them specified as the parent.  
HDSDI [>> HDSDI]: Use the HDSDI INPUT connector to  
control start and stop of recording of this unit.  
BAUDRATE [> BaudRate]: Select the communications speed *9600 [>> 9600]  
(bps) of the RS232C connector.  
19200 [>> 19200]  
38400 [>> 38400]  
57600 [>> 57600]  
115200 [>> 115200]  
i.LINK MODE [> i.LinkMode]: Select the type of connection *AV/C [>> AV/C]: AV/C connection.  
FAM(PC REMOTE) [>> FAM]: FAM connection.  
for the S400 connector.  
NETWORK ENABLE [> Network En]: Select the positions of *NETWORK [>> Network]: Only when the switch is set to  
the remote control switch which enable access to the  
network.  
“NETWORK”.  
NETWORK&RS-422A[>> Net&Rmt]: Only when the switch is  
set to “NETWORK”, or when the switch is set to  
“REMOTE” and the menu item REMOTE I/F is set to  
“9PIN/RS232”.  
WIRELESS RMT [> Wireless]: Enable or disable operation  
DISABLE [>> DISABLE]: Disable.  
*ENABLE [>> ENABLE]: Enable.  
from the wireless remote commander.  
METADATA [Metadata]: Metadata settings  
Description  
INDEX POSITION [> Index Pos]: Specify which frame to use 0SEC [>> 0 sec] to 10SEC [>> 10 sec]: The frame at 0  
as the thumbnail image (index picture) when recording.  
seconds to 10 seconds from the top of the clip, specified in  
units of 1 second.  
Factory default setting: *0 SEC  
STORE OWNER [> Ownership]: Create UMID owner  
The STORED OWNERSHIP screen appears.  
information.  
For details, see Appendix “Setting UMID ownership  
UMID [> UMID]  
SDI OUT [>> SDI out]: Select *ON [>>> ON]: Output.  
whether to output UMID OFF [>>> OFF]: Do not output.  
in the VANC of HD/  
SDSDI output.  
SD VANC LINE [>> SDI  
line]: When SDI OUT is  
set to “ON”, select the  
line of SDSDI output in  
which to output the  
UMID.  
12LINE [>>> 12 line] to 19LINE [>>> 19 line]: Select in the  
range line 12 to line 19.  
Factory default setting: *17LINE (line 17)  
HD VANC LINE [>> HD line]: 9LINE [>>> 9 line] to 20LINE [>>> 20 line]: Select in the  
When SDI OUT is set to  
“ON”, select the line of  
HDSDI output in which to  
output the UMID.  
range line 9 to line 20.  
Factory default setting :*17LINE (line 17)  
103  
System Menu  
                 
METADATA [Metadata]: Metadata settings  
Description  
ESSENCE MARK [>  
EssnceMk]  
SDI OUT [>> SDI out]: Select *ON [>>> ON]: Output.  
whether to output  
essence marks in the  
VANC of HD/SDSDI  
output.  
OFF [>>> OFF]: Do not output.  
SD VANC LINE [>> SDI  
line]: When SDI OUT is  
set to “ON”, select the  
line of SDSDI output in  
which to output essence  
marks.  
12LINE [>>> 12 line] to 19LINE [>>> 19 line]: Select in the  
range line 12 to line 19.  
Factory default setting: *17LINE (line 17)  
HD VANC LINE [>> HD line]: 9LINE [>>> 9 line] to 20LINE [>>> 20 line]: Select in the  
When SDI OUT is set to  
“ON”, select the line of  
HDSDI output in which to  
output essence marks.  
range line 9 to line 20.  
Factory default setting:*17LINE (line 17)  
HD VANC INPUT [> HD  
VANC IN]: Make settings  
related to recording of the  
VANC data contained in  
HDSDI input.  
LINE [>> Line]: Select the  
line whose VANC you  
want to record  
*OFF [>>> OFF]: Do not record VANC from any line.  
9LINE [>>> 9 LINE] to 20LINE [>>> 20 line]: Select from the  
range line 1 to line 20.  
Note  
When this item is set to any setting other than OFF, VANC  
packet information is saved in the DATA ITEM section of MXF  
files.  
DID [>> DID]: Select the DID 00 [>>> 00] to FF [>>> FF]  
of the VANC you want to Factory default setting: *00 [>>> 00]  
record.  
SDID [>> SDID]: Select the  
SDID in the VANC you  
want to record  
00 [>>> 00] to FF [>>> FF]  
Factory default setting: *00 [>>> 00]  
DATA ITEM OUT [> DATA ITEM]: Specify whether to include OFF [>> OFF]: Do not include VANC packet information in  
the information from recorded VANC packets in data items  
in the DATA ITEM section of MXF files.  
data items.  
*ON [>> ON]: Include VANC packet information in data items.  
Note  
Set this menu item to OFF when you connect a nonlinear  
editing system that does not support DATA ITEM.  
SETUP BANK OPERATION [Setup Bank]: Settings related Description  
to menu bank operations  
Menu bank: This unit allows three different complete sets of menu settings to be saved in what are termed “menu banks”  
numbered 1 to 3.  
RECALL BANK 1 [> Recall 1]: Recall menu settings from  
Operate with the following procedure.  
(1) Select the bank you want to recall, then press the ,/OUT  
button.  
Message “RECALL OK?” appears.  
(2) To recall, press the SET button.  
To quit recalling, press the RESET button.  
(3) To save the recalled bank, press the SET button once  
again.  
menu bank 1.  
RECALL BANK 2 [> Recall 2] :Recall menu settings from  
menu bank 2  
RECALL BANK 3 [> Recall 3]: Recall menu settings from  
menu bank 3.  
SAVE BANK 1 [> Save 1]: Save current menu settings to  
Operate with the following procedure.  
(1) Select the bank you want to save, then press the ,/OUT  
button.  
Message “SAVE OK?” appears.  
(2) To save, press the SET button.  
To quit saving, press the RESET button.  
menu bank 1.  
SAVE BANK 2 [> Save 2]: Save current menu settings to  
menu bank 2.  
SAVE BANK 3 [> Save 3]: Save current menu settings to  
menu bank 3.  
104  
System Menu  
 
MENU GRADE [Menu grade]: Selection of menu items to Description  
be displayed  
Determine whether to display basic items only or both basic  
and enhanced items in the monitor video section and the time *ENHANCED [>> Enhanced]: Display both basic and  
data display section when using the setup menu.  
BASIC [>> Basic]: Display basic items only.  
enhanced items.  
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
Setup Menu Operations  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
TIME CODE  
This section explains how to change menu settings.  
DISC PROTECTION  
VIDEO CONTROL  
AUDIO CONTROL  
INTERFACE SELECT  
METADATA  
Buttons used to change settings  
Use the following buttons to change menu settings.  
SETUP BANK OPERATION  
Menu control buttons  
Functions  
MENU GRADE  
: ENHAN  
MENU button  
• Display and hide the menu.  
• Return to the menu from  
setting screens.  
2
Press the ,/OUT button.  
M/MARK1 and m/MARK2 These buttons move the  
buttons  
This displays menu level 2 for the menu item selected  
in step 1.  
highlighted cursor up and down  
within the current level to select  
an item or setting. Hold down  
one of these buttons to make  
the highlighted cursor move  
continuously.  
Example: Screen display of the second level of the  
DISPLAY CONTROL menu  
</IN and ,/OUT buttons Press the ,/OUT button to go  
down one level.  
SETUP MENU  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
Press the </IN button to go  
CHARA.POSITION  
up one level.  
:WHITE  
:x1  
CHARA.TYPE  
CHARA.VSIZE  
DISPLAY INFO  
SUB STATUS  
MENU DISPLAY  
BRIGHTNESS  
ALARM  
Hold down one of these  
buttons to make the highlighted  
cursor move continuously.  
:T&STA  
:OFF  
:WHITE  
:55  
RESET button  
SET button  
• Returns the setting to the  
factory default setting.  
:ON  
• Answer “No” to the question.  
:DIS  
:ALL  
MENU STATUS  
HD CHARA  
• Saves the new setting in  
memory.  
• Answer Yes” to the question.  
Current setting  
Changing the settings of menu items  
Proceed as follows to change the settings of menu items.  
3
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
the required item.  
For menu items on level 3, press the ,/OUT button  
to go to level 3, then press the M/MARK1 or m/  
MARK2 button to select the item whose setting you  
wish to change.  
1
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to select  
the required item.  
Example: Screen display when DISPLAY  
CONTROL is selected  
Example: Screen display when SUB STATUS is  
selected  
105  
System Menu  
           
Notes  
SETUP MENU  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
• If you power off the unit before a save operation is  
completed, settings may be lost. Wait until the save  
is completed before powering off the unit.  
• If, instead of pressing the SET button, you press the  
MENU button, the new settings are not saved. The  
message “ABORT !” appears in the monitor video  
section and “Abort !” in the time data display section  
for about 0.5 second, and the system exits the menus.  
To change more than one setting, be sure to press the  
SET button after making the settings.  
CHARA.POSITION  
CHARA.TYPE  
CHARA.VSIZE  
DISPLAY INFO  
SUB STATUS  
MENU DISPLAY  
BRIGHTNESS  
ALARM  
:WHITE  
:x1  
:T&STA  
:OFF  
:WHITE  
:55  
:ON  
:DIS  
:ALL  
MENU STATUS  
HD CHARA  
4
Press the ,/OUT button.  
This displays all possible settings for the item selected  
in step 3.  
Meanings of indications on the menu  
screen  
SETUP MENU  
On-screen indication  
Right-pointing arrow (c) at Pressing the ,/OUT button  
the right of a menu item switches to the next lower  
Meaning  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
:OFF  
SUB STATUS  
* OFF  
TC MODE  
REMAIN  
See step 1 of the foregoing menu level or to a setting  
selection screen.  
operating procedure (see  
CLIP NO  
PLAYBACK REMAIN  
Left-pointing arrow (C) at  
the left of a menu item  
Pressing the </IN button  
returns to the previous (higher)  
See step 2 of the foregoing menu level.  
operating procedure (see  
5
Press the M/MARK1 or m/MARK2 button to change  
the setting of the item.  
Character string at the  
right of a menu item  
Current setting of the menu  
item  
When shown with a colon (:):  
the current setting is the  
same as the factory default  
setting.  
SETUP MENU  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
:OFF  
SUB STATUS  
* OFF  
See step 2 of the foregoing  
operating procedure (see  
TC MODE  
REMAIN  
CLIP NO  
PLAYBACK REMAIN  
When shown with a raised  
dot (): the current setting  
is different from the factory  
default setting.  
See the next item, “Hiding  
enhanced items”.  
6
7
To change other settings, press the </IN button to  
return to the previous screen, then repeat steps 3 to 5  
as required.  
An * (asterisk) in a  
Factory default setting  
complete list of settings  
See step 4 of the foregoing  
operating procedure (see  
When you have completed the settings, press the SET  
button.  
Hiding enhanced items  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears in the  
monitor video section, and “Saving...” appears in the  
time data display section, while the new settings are  
saved in memory.  
When the saving operation is completed, the monitor  
video section and time data display section return to  
their normal indications.  
The setup menu can be used to hide enhanced items. To  
hide enhanced items, proceed as follows as explained in  
the previous section “Changing the settings of menu  
items” to set the MENU GRADE item to “BASIC”. In  
other words, after selecting MENU GRADE in step 1 of  
“Changing the settings of menu items”, select “BASIC”  
and then press the SET button to save the setting to  
memory.  
106  
System Menu  
   
Once the MENU GRADE item has been set to “BASIC”,  
only the basic, top-level menu items appear when you  
press the MENU button and the ,/OUT button to display  
the setup menu.  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears in the  
monitor video section, and “Saving...” appears in the  
time data display, while the settings of all items are  
returned to their factory default settings. These factory  
default settings are saved in memory.  
SETUP MENU  
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
DISPLAY CONTROL  
Note  
SETUP BANK OPERATION  
If you power off the unit while settings are being  
saved, settings may not be correctly returned to their  
factory default settings. Wait until the saving is  
completed before powering off the unit.  
BASIC  
MENU GRADE  
To abandon the resetting operation  
Instead of pressing the SET button, press the RESET  
button.  
The display returns to the top level of setup menu,  
leaving the settings unchanged.  
Current setting  
Returning menu settings to their factory  
default settings  
After making menu setting changes, to return settings to  
their factory default settings (setting initialization), use the  
following procedure.  
Disc Menu  
Use the disc menu to delete data on discs and to format  
discs.  
To return a particular setting to its factory default  
setting  
In the section , carry out the procedure up to step 5, then  
with the current setting displayed (in the example, if the  
factory default setting has been changed, the current  
setting will be TC MODE), proceed as follows.  
For the method of displaying the disc menu, see  
DISC MENU  
STATUS  
DELETE  
FORMAT  
1
2
Press the RESET button.  
“OFF” (factory default setting) is selected.  
Press the SET button.  
The setting returned to its factory default is saved in  
memory as the current setting.  
The disc menu contains the following items. Characters  
and symbols inside the brackets [ ] appear in the time data  
display section.  
To return all settings to their factory default  
settings  
1
2
Display the setup menu.  
Press the RESET button.  
STATUS [Status]  
Displays disc or clip status.  
DISC [> Disc]: Displays the DISC STATUS screen.  
CLIP [> Clip]: Displays the CLIP STATUS screen.  
A message appears, to confirm whether or not you  
wish to return all settings to their factory default  
settings.  
Note  
The PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software allows you to write  
TITLE1 and TITLE2 to the disc, but only TITLE1 appears  
here.  
Message in the monitor Initialize all items to factory  
video section  
preset values?  
Message in the time  
data display  
Init setup?  
DELETE [Delete]  
Deletes clips from the disc.  
LAST CLIP [> Last Clip]: Deletes the most recently  
recorded clip.  
3
Press the SET button.  
107  
System Menu  
     
ALL CLIP [> All Clip]: Delete all clips. (Clips in the  
To clear the menu from the screen  
Press the MENU button twice.  
General directory are not deleted.)  
FORMAT [Format]  
Formats a disc.  
To delete the most recent recorded clip  
QUICK FORMAT [>Quick Format]: Deletes all  
data on the disc, including the contents of the  
General directory.  
Note  
If the clip is locked, it cannot be deleted.  
Proceed as follows.  
Disc Menu Operations  
1
2
Display the disc menu (see page 90).  
To display the status of the current disc or  
clip  
Insert a disc, and then proceed as follows.  
Press the M/MARK1 button or the m/MARK2 button  
to select DELETE.  
3
4
Press the ,/OUT button.  
1
2
Display the disc menu (see page 90).  
The name of the clip to be deleted appears.  
Press the M/MARK1 button or m/MARK2 button to  
select STATUS.  
Press the SET button.  
The clip is deleted, and the number of the deleted clip  
appears.  
3
4
Press the ,/OUT button.  
Select DISC or CLIP and press the ,/OUT button.  
To return to the next highest level without deleting  
the clip  
Press the MENU button.  
If you selected DISC, the status of the loaded disc  
appears.  
To clear the menu from the screen  
DISC STATUS  
Press the MENU button twice.  
USER ID:  
TITLE :  
To delete all clips  
REMAIN  
: 029 min  
: 0002 times  
REWRITE  
Note  
SALVAGE  
:
:
OK  
OK  
FILE SYSTEM  
Carrying out the following procedure deletes all clips that  
are not locked.  
TO MENU :  
MENU KEY  
Proceed as follows.  
If you selected CLIP, the status of the current clip  
appears.  
1
2
Display the disc menu (see page 90).  
CLIP STATUS  
Press the M/MARK1 button or the m/MARK2 button  
to select DELETE.  
CLIP LIST MODE  
:
E0001  
E0001  
CLIP LIST NEME  
3
4
5
Press the ,/OUT button.  
TITLE:  
:
:
:
:
PDW-F75  
10001  
RECORD DEVICE  
Select ALL CLIP, then press the ,/OUT button.  
SERIAL  
06/3/02  
19:54:38  
DATE  
TIME  
When the message “ALL DELETE OK?” appears,  
press the SET button.  
:
MENU KEY  
TO MENU  
All of the clips on the disc are deleted.  
When playback or search reaches a new clip, the  
display changes to the status of the new clip.  
To return to the next highest level without deleting  
the clips  
Press the RESET button.  
To return to the next highest level  
Press the MENU button.  
108  
System Menu  
         
To clear the menu from the screen  
Press the MENU button.  
To format a disc  
109  
System Menu  
 
Using Option Boards  
7
Chapter  
Option Boards for  
Using the PDBK-101  
Enhanced Functionality Network Board (Gigabit  
Ethernet)  
You can enhance the functionality of this unit by installing  
option boards in the option slots.  
Installing the PDBK-101 Network Board in slot 1 adds a  
network connector ( ) to this unit. This allows you to  
connect to a computer or network for high-speed FTP file  
transfers. You can also connect the unit to a Web site and  
display the unit’s device information (model name, serial  
number, system frequency, software version, etc.).  
You can install up to two option boards. The boards which  
may be installed in each slot differ, as follows.  
Slot 1: PDBK-101  
Slot 2: One board from among the PDBK-102, PDBK-  
103, and PDBK-104  
Warning  
CAUTION  
Improper installation of option boards can result in fire,  
electric shock, bodily injury, and damage to equipment in  
the vicinity. For safety, always have option boards  
installed by a trained technician.  
When you connect the unit to a computer or network, use  
a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction due to  
radiation noise.  
Refer to the operation manual supplied with each board  
for information about installing, configuring, and  
operating the board.  
Computer Connection Example (FTP  
Connection)  
Contact your Sony dealer regarding installation of option  
boards.  
The following example shows a connection between this  
unit and a laptop computer.  
110  
Option Boards for Enhanced Functionality / Using the PDBK-101 Network Board (Gigabit Ethernet)  
                 
ACHTUNG  
Aus Sicherheitsgründen nicht mit einem Peripheriegerät-  
Anschluss verbinden, der zu starke Spannung für die  
Buchse dieses Geräts haben könnte.  
Folgen Sie beim Herstellen von Verbindungen den  
Anweisungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung.  
Laptop computer  
To network  
connector  
ATTENTION  
Par mesure de sécurité, ne raccordez pas le connecteur  
pour le câblage de périphériques pouvant avoir une tension  
excessive au port de cet appareil.  
Network cable (not supplied)  
Suivez les instructions dans ce manuel pour les  
raccordements.  
To  
network connector (GbE)  
ACHTUNG  
Aus Sicherheitsgründen nicht mit einem Peripheriegerät-  
Anschluss verbinden, der zu starke Spannung für die  
Buchse dieses Geräts haben könnte.  
Folgen Sie beim Herstellen von Verbindungen den  
Anweisungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung.  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
F5  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
PDW-F75  
Set the remote control switch to “NETWORK”.  
Notes  
• Install the PDBK-101 in option slot 1.  
• Make network settings in the network settings menu.  
This menu appears only when the PDBK-101 option  
board is installed.  
Refer to the PDBK-101 operation manual for more  
information about the network settings menu.  
Caution  
For safety, do not connect a peripheral device connector  
that might have excessive voltage to the network connector  
of this unit.  
Follow the instructions in this manual when making  
connections.  
ATTENTION  
Par mesure de sécurité, ne raccordez pas le connecteur  
pour le câblage de périphériques pouvant avoir une tension  
excessive au port de cet appareil.  
Suivez les instructions dans ce manuel pour les  
raccordements.  
111  
Using the PDBK-101 Network Board (Gigabit Ethernet)  
• The PDBK-103 and PDBK-104 cannot be used when the  
PDBK-102 is installed.  
Using the PDBK-102  
MPEG-TS Input/Output  
Board  
With the PDBK-102 MPEG-TS Input/Output Board  
installed in option slot 2 of this unit, you can make i.LINK  
connections between this unit and video devices  
1)  
complying with the HDV 1080i standard (called “HDV  
devices” below), and between this unit and computers to  
which HDV devices may be connected. These connections  
can be used for input and output of MPEG-2 TS streams.  
This allows you to input material shot by HDV camcorders  
or the results of editing on a computer, and to record the  
input on XDCAM discs. You can also output video and  
audio from this unit to HDV devices.  
1) HDV and  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation and Victor  
Company of Japan, Limited.  
HDV Connection Example  
The following example shows a connection between this  
unit and an HDV camcorder.  
PDW-F75  
EJECT  
F1  
F2  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
MENU  
F4  
F5  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
JOG  
PAGE DISPLAY  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY  
S400 connector (6-pin)  
i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
HDV camcorder  
i.LINK connector (4-pin)  
Notes  
• Install the PDBK-102 in option slot 2.  
112  
Using the PDBK-102 MPEG-TS Input/Output Board  
         
Using the PDBK-103  
Analog HD Input Board  
Using the PDBK-104 SD  
Input Upconverter Board  
With the PDBK-103 Analog HD Input Board installed in  
option slot 2 of this unit, you can record HD analog signals  
such as YPbPr signals and RGB signals in addition to  
HDSDI signals.  
With the PDBK-104 SD Input Upconverter Board  
installed in option slot 2 of this unit, you can record SDSDI  
and composite signals in addition to HDSDI signals. These  
signals can be recorded in DVCAM format, or  
upconverted before recording.  
Camcorder Connection Example  
Disc Recorder Connection Example  
PDW-F335 Professional Disc Camcorder  
PDW-1500 Professional Disc Recorder  
EJECT  
SG DATA  
ANA SDI  
AE8/EBU  
dB OVER  
0
SG DATA  
ANA SDI  
AE8/EBU  
dB OVER  
0
SG DATA  
ANA SDI  
AE8/EBU  
dB OVER  
0
SG DATA  
ANA SDI  
AE8/EBU  
dB OVER  
0
[
]
EDIT REMOTE 9P iLINK  
KEY INH  
ALARM  
ACCESS  
INPUT  
i.LINK  
SDI  
VITC VIUB COUNTER VITC REC INH  
CMPST  
Y-R,B  
SG  
NETWORK  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
-12  
-20  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
MONITOR  
1/2 3/4  
[
]
MONITOR  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
48  
AUDIO  
625 IMX 50 40 30  
CH  
-
15  
CH  
-
26  
CH  
-
37  
CH  
-
5/6 7/8 4 8 CH  
18 24 BIT 525 DVCAM  
L
MIX  
R
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
COUNTER  
SYS MENU  
MENU  
SHIFT  
MONITOR SEL METER SEL INPUT CH  
INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
SELECT  
HOLD  
SUB THUMB  
ALL/CH-1  
PLAY  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
VARIABLE  
REC  
CLIP  
NAIL  
SET RESET  
PRESET  
PB  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
MENU  
PHONES  
NEXT  
PREV  
TOP  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
MARK2  
Y/Pb/Pr output  
SDSDI output or  
composite output  
Cable with BNC  
connectors (not supplied)  
× 3  
Cable with BNC  
connectors (not supplied)  
Y/Pb/Pr input  
SDSDI input or  
composite input  
EJECT  
F1  
EJECT  
F2  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
ACCESS  
F3  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
ACCESS  
MENU  
F4  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
VAR  
MARK1  
NETWORK  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
MENU  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
F5  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
SET RESET  
JOG  
LOCAL  
PAGE DISPLAY  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
REMOTE  
LEVEL  
SET RESET  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
JOG  
MENU  
MARK2  
PAGE DISPLAY  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
MARK2  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
SHUTTLE  
KEY INHI  
CH  
1
CH  
2
CH  
3
CH  
4
PHONES  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
SHIFT  
TOP  
END  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
STANDBY  
PDW-F75  
PDW-F75  
Notes  
Notes  
• Install the PDBK-103 in option slot 2.  
• The PDBK-102 and PDBK-104 cannot be used when the  
PDBK-103 is installed.  
• Select YPbPr signals or RGB signals in the input video  
selection menu. These menu items appear only when the  
optional input board is installed.  
• Install the PDBK-104 in option slot 2.  
• The PDBK-102 and PDBK-103 cannot be used when the  
PDBK-104 is installed.  
• Select SDSDI or composite signals in the input video  
selection menu. These menu items appear only when the  
optional input board is installed.  
• To record in the DVCAM format, set OPERATIONAL  
FUNCTION >REC FORMAT in the setup menu to  
“DVCAM”.  
113  
Using the PDBK-103 Analog HD Input Board / Using the PDBK-104 SD Input Upconverter Board  
                   
Appendix  
temperature inside a car with the windows closed can  
easily exceed 50°C (122°F).  
• In damp or dusty locations  
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain  
• Locations subject to violent vibration  
• Near strong magnetic fields  
Important Notes on  
Operation  
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong  
electromagnetic fields.  
Use and storage  
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods  
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks  
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body  
warped.  
To prevent electromagnetic interference from  
portable communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other communications  
devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and  
interference with audio and video signals.  
Do not cover the unit while operating  
Doing so will cause temperatures to rise inside the unit,  
possibly resulting in failure.  
It is recommended that the portable communications  
devices near this unit be powered off.  
After use  
Turn off the on/standby switch.  
If you plan not to use the unit for a long time, turn off the  
POWER switch on the rear panel as well.  
About the LCD panel  
LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high  
precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of  
99.99% or higher. However, very rarely, one or more  
pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in  
white, red, blue, or green.  
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such pixels have  
no effect on the recorded data, and the unit may be used  
with confidence even if they are present.  
Shipping  
• Remove the disc before transporting the unit.  
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other  
transportation service, pack it in the shipping carton of  
the unit.  
Care of the unit  
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft, dry cloth.  
In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in a little neutral  
detergent, then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents such  
as alcohol or thinners, as these may cause discoloration or  
other damage to the finish of the unit.  
Condensation  
If you move the unit from a very cold place to a warm  
place, or use it in a damp location, condensation may form  
on the optical pickup. Then, if the unit is operated in this  
state, recording and playback may not be performed  
properly.  
In the event of operating problems  
If you should experience problems with the unit, contact  
your Sony dealer.  
Do the following to prevent this from happening.  
• When you move or operate the unit in an environment  
where condensation may form, be sure to insert a disc in  
advance.  
• Whenever you turn on the On/standby switch, check that  
the HUMID indicator does not appear on the LCD panel.  
Use and storage locations  
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the  
unit in the following places.  
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature range:  
5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F))  
Remember that in summer or in warm climates the  
114  
Important Notes on Operation  
         
If it appears, wait until it disappears before inserting a  
disc.  
Periodic Maintenance  
Digital Hours Meter  
The digital hours meter can provide information about the  
operational history of the unit. Use the information as a  
guide in scheduling periodic maintenance. For periodic  
maintenance, contact your Sony dealer.  
To display digital hours meter  
The digital hours meter appears in both the monitor video  
section and time data display section as the digital hours  
meter menu of the system menu. It can also be  
superimposed on the screen of the external video monitor  
connected to the unit (see page 40).  
To display the digital hours meter, proceed as follows.  
1
2
Press the MENU button to display the system menu  
Press the M/MARK1 button or m/MARK2 button,  
select the HOURS METER (Hours Meter in the time  
data display section), and then press the ,/OUT  
button.  
HOURS METER  
H1  
H2  
H3  
H4  
H5  
317/  
22  
317  
HOURS  
92  
HOURS  
HOURS  
TIMES  
92  
114  
H1:OPERATION  
H2:LASER PARAMETER  
H3:SEEK RUNNING  
H4:SPINDLE RUNNING  
H5:LOADING COUNTER  
Display of the digital hours meter  
Any of the items can be reset during periodic maintenance  
or parts replacement. Resetting items allows you to  
roughly determine the timing of next periodic  
maintenance.  
For display resetting, contact your Sony dealer.  
Item name (name between Description  
[ ] is name in the time data  
display section)  
H1: OPERATION [Opr]  
Displays the total number of  
hours the unit has been  
powered on in units of hours.  
115  
Periodic Maintenance  
         
Item name (name between Description  
[ ] is name in the time data  
display section)  
Troubleshooting  
H2: LASER PARAMETER  
[Lasr] (optical heads  
output counter)  
Displays a cumulative count  
of the number of outputs  
from the optical heads, with  
adjustments for operating  
mode and operating  
temperature.  
Alarms  
An alarm (warning message) appears in the time data  
display section when an operation is attempted which is  
inappropriate for the settings on this unit or the state of the  
disc. Both the alarm message and the action to take to  
resolve the problem appear in the monitor video section  
and on the screen of the external video monitor connected  
to the unit.  
H3: SEEK RUNNING [Seek] This shows the cumulative  
seek operation time for  
optical head in units of  
hours.  
H4: SPINDLE RUNNING  
This shows the cumulative  
spindle rotation time in units  
of hours.  
[Spdl]  
H5: LOADING COUNTER  
Display the total number of  
times discs have been  
loaded in the unit.  
[Load]  
Example alarm in time data display section  
To exit from the digital hours meter  
ALARM  
Press the MENU button.  
REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET REMOTE/LOCAL/NETWORK  
SWITCH TO LOCAL.  
Example alarm in monitor video section  
When an alarm is displayed, remove the alarm cause by  
following the action to take. If the alarm display does not  
disappear, contact your Sony dealer.  
Please note that there are some alarms which do not appear  
depending on the setting of DISPLAY CONTROL  
>ALARM in the setup menu (see page 96).  
See “System Menu” (page 90) for more information about  
setup menu operations.  
You can check a history of the most recent alarms by  
selecting the LAST ALARM item in the system menu.  
When the unit is powered on  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video section  
Description/action  
MENU Ver. UP  
ILL. SETUP!  
THE SETUP MENU SOFTWARE HAS BEEN  
UPGRADED.  
SET THE SETUP MENU ITEMS TO THE  
DESIRED SETTINGS.  
Reset the settings in the setup menu (see page  
91).  
INVALID SETTINGS SELECTED IN SETUP  
MENU.  
SET ITEMS IN THE SETUP MENU TO THE  
APPROPRIATE VALUES. CONTACT SERVICE  
IF THIS ALARM APPEARS AGAIN AFTER  
ABOVE PROCEDURE.  
Reset the settings in the setup menu (see page  
91). If the same message appears after you  
reset the settings, contact your Sony dealer.  
116  
Troubleshooting  
       
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video section  
Description/action  
Exchg batt!  
BATTERY NEEDS REPLACING. PLEASE  
CONTACT SERVICE.  
The NVRAM battery is exhausted. Contact your  
Sony dealer.  
When a disc is inserted  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
Description/action  
Format the disc, or eject it (see page 44).  
section  
Unknown FS!  
UNKNOWN FILE SYSTEM.  
PLEASE FORMAT DISC OR EJECT.  
No FS!  
NO FILE SYSTEM.PLEASE EJECT DISC. Eject the disc.  
ILL. Disc!  
IRREGULAR DISC IS USED.  
USE PROFESSIONAL DISC.  
Use a Professional Disc.  
Salvage NG!  
CLIP SALVAGE WAS NOT COMPLETED. See “Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not  
a)  
IRREGULAR DISC IS USED. DVCAM  
525/60 CLIP(S) EXIST.  
Use another disc.  
525/60 Clip  
a)  
IRREGULAR DISC IS USED. DVCAM  
625/50 CLIP(S) EXIST.  
625/50 Clip  
a)  
DISC HAS 4CHx16 BIT CLIP(S).  
CHANGE RECORD FORMAT IN SETUP MODE in the setup menu (see page 101).  
Change the setting of AUDIO CONTROL >REC  
4CHx16 Clip  
MENU.  
a)  
DISC HAS 2CHx16 BIT CLIP(S).  
CHANGE RECORD FORMAT IN SETUP MODE in the setup menu (see page 101).  
Change the setting of AUDIO CONTROL >REC  
2CHx16 Clip  
MENU.  
No Support!  
FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED.  
RECORDING AND PLAYBACK IS NOT  
POSSIBLE.  
A disc in an unsupported recording format is loaded.  
Use a disc formatted in the MPEG HD or DVCAM  
format.  
ILL. Index!  
INDEX FILE ERROR.  
PLEASE FORMAT DISC OR EJECT.  
Format the disc, or eject it (see page 44).  
FORMAT NG!  
AUTO FORMATTING WAS NOT  
COMPLETED.  
Eject the disc and insert it again, or insert another  
disc.  
DI read err  
Read err  
CANNOT READ DISC  
INFORMATION.PLEASE EJECT DISC.  
DRV ADJ err  
CANNOT PERFORM AUTO DRIVE  
ADJUSTMENT.  
a) Displayed only when DISPLAY CONTROL >ALARM is set to “ON” or  
“LIMITED”.  
During front panel operations  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Description/action  
a)  
KEY INHIBIT MODE IS SELECTED.  
This appears when the KEY INH (SHIFT + DISPLAY)  
button is on.  
KEY INHI.!  
Turn the KEY INH button off.  
a)  
REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET REMOTE/LOCAL/NETWORK  
SWITCH TO LOCAL.  
Set the remote control switch to “LOCAL.  
REMOTE!  
a)  
NO DISC.  
Insert a disc and try again.  
No Disc!  
117  
Troubleshooting  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Description/action  
REC INHI.!  
THE DISC WRITE PROTECT TAB IS SET Set the disc’s Write Inhibit tab to enable recording  
TO SAVE.  
REC INHIBIT MODE IS SELECTED.  
This appears when REC INH on page P1 of the  
function menu is set to “ON”.  
Set REC INH to “OFF” (see page 89).  
b)  
NO CLIP.  
This appears when a playback, search or delete  
operation is attempted on a disc with no clips  
recorded on it.  
No Clip!  
Insert a disc with clips recorded on it.  
a)  
DISC TOP.  
DISC END.  
This appears if you press the PREV button or conduct  
a high-speed reverse search when the unit is stopped  
at the start of the disc.  
Disc Top!  
Use forward search or playback instead.  
a)  
This appears if you press the NEXT button or conduct  
a forward high-speed search when the unit is stopped  
at the end of the disc.  
Disc End!  
Use reverse search or playback instead.  
MAX # Clips  
MAX # Files  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
FOR MORE RECORDING, DELETE  
SOME CLIPS.  
Delete unneeded clips, or insert a disc with enough  
free space.  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
FOR MORE RECORDING SPACE,  
DELETE CLIPS OR NON-AV DATA.  
(GENERAL FILES)  
Delete clips or GENERAL files.  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.FOR Delete unneeded clips, or insert a disc with enough  
MORE RECORDING SPACE, DELETE  
OTHER CLIP LISTS.  
free space.  
Disc Full!  
DISC FULL.FOR MORE RECORDING,  
DELETE SOME CLIPS.  
Delete unneeded clips, or insert a disc with enough  
free space.  
b)  
NO MORE SUB CLIPS CAN BE ADDED  
TO CLIP LIST.  
This appears when an attempt is made to add sub  
clips when 300 sub clips have already been  
registered.  
MAX# SB CLP  
Limit the creation of sub clips to 300 or fewer.  
b)  
DURATION OF ONE CLIP LIST MUST BE This appears when you try to add a sub clip when the  
CL OVER DUR  
LESS THAN 24 HOURS.  
total duration of sub clips in a clip list has already  
reached 24 hours.  
Create clip lists so that the total duration is within 24  
hours.  
Run Salvage  
EXECUTE SALVAGE PROGRAM.  
This appears when recording, E-E display, essence  
mark recording, or sub clip addition for quick scene  
selection is attempted on a disc that needs to be  
salvaged.  
Try again after salvaging the clips on the disc (see  
a)  
COUNTER MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET COUNTER SELECT SWITCH TO TC function menu is set to “COUNTER”, and you try to  
This appears when CNTR SEL on page P1 of the  
CNT mode!  
OR UB.  
preset timecode or user bits.  
To use timecode or user bits, set CNTR SEL to “TC”  
or “UB” (see page 89).  
b)  
TC EXTERNAL IS SELECTED.  
SET TC INTERNAL MODE IN FUNCTION menu is set to “EXT”, and you try to preset timecode  
This appears when TCG on page P2 of the function  
TC EXT!  
MENU.  
or user bits by setting TC MODE to “PRESET”.  
Set TCG to “INT” (see page 89).  
a)  
TCG REGEN MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET TC PRESET MODE IN FUNCTION  
MENU.  
This appears when TC MODE on page P2 of the  
function menu is set to “REGEN”, and you try to  
preset timecode or user bits.  
REGEN mode!  
Set TC MODE to “PRESET” (see page 90).  
118  
Troubleshooting  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Description/action  
a)  
TCG RUN MODE IS SET TO REC RUN.  
SET TC FREE RUN MODE IN FUNCTION function menu is set to “REC RUN”, and you try to  
This appears when RUN MODE on page P2 of the  
REC RUN!  
MENU.  
preset timecode or user bits.  
Set RUN MODE to “FREE RUN” (see page 90).  
b)  
THUMBNAIL(S) CANNOT BE  
DISPLAYED DURING RECORDING.  
Stop recording and try again.  
REC mode!  
CANNOT EXECUTE IN REC MODE.  
DRIVE MAINTENANCE MENU CANNOT  
BE EXECUTED WHILE IN REC MODE.  
b)  
CLIP LIST IS NOT SELECTED.  
This appears when you press the SUB CLIP button  
while the clip list on the disc is not loaded into the  
current clip list.  
No SEL List  
Load the clip list (see page 67) and try again.  
a)  
CLIP LIST CANNOT LOCATE SPECIFIED This appears when a playback button is pressed with  
No SUB CLIP  
SUB CLIP(S).  
no sub clips in the current clip list.  
Playback is not possible when there are no sub clips  
in the current clip list.  
b)  
TO ADD AN ESSENCE MARK, EXIT  
FROM SUB CLIP MODE FIRST.  
This appears when you press the ESSENCE MARK  
(SHIFT + THUMBNAIL) button with the SUB CLIP  
SB CLP mode  
button lit.  
Try again after pressing the SUB CLIP button to turn it  
off.  
b)  
SUB CLIP IS INVALID.  
SET APPROPRIATE IN/OUT POINTS.  
Set the In and Out points again.  
SUB CLIP NG  
b)  
NO CLIP LIST.  
This appears when you try to delete a clip list when  
there is no clip list saved on the disc.  
Load the disc that contains the clip list you want to  
delete.  
No List!  
b)  
STOP ONCE, THEN EXECUTE.  
This appears when you press the SUB CLIP button  
during clip list playback.  
STOP ONCE!  
Stop the playback and try again.  
No EM space  
ESSENCE MARK NOT RECORDED.  
NO SPACE AVAILABLE TO RECORD  
ESSENCE MARK.  
Use the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software to delete  
unneeded essence marks.  
Delete unneeded shot marks in the CHAPTER  
screen.  
EM Full!  
NO MORE ESSENCE MARKS CAN BE  
RECORDED.  
Disc Damage  
NON-AV Full  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
USE ANOTHER DISC FOR RECORDING.  
Use another disc.  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
FOR MORE RECORDING SPACE,  
DELETE CLIPS OR NON-AV DATA.  
(GENERAL FILES)  
Delete unneeded clips or GENERAL files.  
Index File!  
UNSUPPORT INDEX FILE.  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
Use another disc.  
File System  
CURRENT VERSION OF THE  
SOFTWARE SETS THE DISC WRITE  
PROTECTED.  
This appears when you insert a disc that can be  
played back but not recorded.  
Exchange the disc for one with a file system  
supported by this unit. Or format the disc (see page  
44).  
FILE SYSTEM ON THE DISC INHIBITS  
WRITING.  
a)  
LOADING.  
This appears if you press a button while a disc is  
loading. Wait until the disc has finished loading and  
try again.  
Loading!  
a)  
UNLOADING.  
This appears if you press a button while a disc is  
unloading.  
Unloading!  
Wait until the disc has finished unloading and try  
again.  
119  
Troubleshooting  
a) Displayed only when DISPLAY CONTROL >ALARM is set to “ON”.  
b) Displayed only when DISPLAY CONTROL >ALARM is set to “ON” or  
“LIMITED”.  
During recording and editing operations  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Description/action  
a)  
INPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCY IS NOT  
THE SAME AS THE SYSTEM SETUP.  
This appears when an input signal does not match  
the system frequency of this unit.  
Input Sig!”  
Input a signal that matches the system frequency, or  
change this unit's system frequency setting (see page  
27).  
a)  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED. HD 60I  
or HD 30P CLIP(S) EXIST.  
This appears when the system frequency of this unit  
does not match that of the loaded disc.  
Insert a disc that matches the system frequency, or  
change this unit's system frequency setting (see page  
27).  
HD 60I/30P  
a)  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED. HD 50I  
or HD 25P CLIP(S) EXIST.  
HD 50I/25P  
a)  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED. HD  
23.98P CLIP(S) EXIST.  
HD 23P Disc  
a)  
INPUT VIDEO SIGNAL DOES NOT  
SYNCHRONIZE WITH REF VIDEO  
SIGNAL.  
Input a reference signal synchronized with this unit’s  
system frequency.  
ILL. REF!  
USE COMMON REFERENCE SIGNAL  
OR CONNECT RECORDER REF OUT TO  
PLAYER REF IN.  
a)  
ENCODING DOES NOT SYNCHRONIZE Check the signals being input to this unit.  
WITH REF VIDEO.  
ILL. REC!  
a)  
ILLEGAL PLAYBACK.  
MEMORY FULL !!  
Check the disc being played by this unit.  
Check the disc being recorded by this unit.  
ILL. PLAY!  
a)  
MEM. Full!  
a)  
MEMORY EMPTY !!  
NOW RECORDING ...  
MEM. Empty!  
Recording  
Wait for recording to finish.  
Drive Busy!  
PREVIOUS CLIP HAS NOT BEEN  
RECORDED ON TO THE DISC  
This appears when a clip has been saved to this unit’s  
temporary memory but recording to the disc has not  
YET.STOP RECORDING AND WAIT TILL been completed. Wait until recording to the disc  
THE ACCESS LED TURN OFF. finishes (until the ACCESS indicator turns off).  
a) Displayed only when DISPLAY CONTROL >ALARM is set to “ON” or  
“LIMITED”.  
120  
Troubleshooting  
During playback  
Alarm message in time data  
display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Description/action  
a)  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH HD 50I or HD 25P  
RECORDING.  
This appears when the system frequency of this  
unit does not match that of the loaded disc.  
Insert a disc that matches the system frequency,  
or change this unit’s system frequency setting  
525/60 Disc  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH HD 23.98P  
RECORDING.  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH DVCAM 625/50  
RECORDING.  
a)  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH HD 60I or HD 30P  
RECORDING.  
625/50 Disc  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH HD 23.98P  
RECORDING.  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH DVCAM 525/60  
RECORDING.  
a)  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH HD 50I or HD 25P  
RECORDING.  
HD 60I/30P  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH HD 23.98P  
RECORDING.  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH DVCAM 625/50  
RECORDING.  
a)  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED  
BACK.USE DISC WITH HD 60I or HD  
30P RECORDING.  
HD 50I/25P!  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED  
BACK.USE DISC WITH HD 23.98P  
RECORDING.  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED  
BACK.USE DISC WITH DVCAM 525/  
60 RECORDING.  
a)  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED BACK.  
USE DISC WITH HD 60I or HD 30P  
RECORDING.  
HD 23P Disc  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED  
BACK.USE DISC WITH HD 50I or HD  
25P RECORDING.  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED  
BACK.USE DISC WITH DVCAM 525/  
60 RECORDING.  
DISC CANNOT BE PLAYED  
BACK.USE DISC WITH DVCAM 625/  
50 RECORDING.  
Disc Error!  
DISC ERROR DETECTED.  
Use another disc.  
a) Displayed only when DISPLAY CONTROL >ALARM is set to “ON” or  
“LIMITED”.  
121  
Troubleshooting  
During thumbnail search, scene selection, and clip list operations  
Alarm message in monitor Description/action  
video section  
CANNOT EXPAND CLIP  
ANY FURTHER.  
The clip cannot be expanded into more blocks.  
This appears when the EXPAND button is pressed when the number of block is maximum, or  
when the duration of an expanded thumbnail is 1 frame.  
SELECTED ESSENCE  
MARK  
DOES NOT EXIST.  
The selected essence mark does not exist.  
This appears in the essence mark selection screen when the specified essence mark does not  
exist on the disc.  
SUB CLIP IS INVALID.  
SET APPROPRIATE  
IN/OUT POINTS.  
The temporal relationship between the specified In and Out points in a TRIM operation (see  
page 76) is not correct.  
Reset so that the value of the Out point timecode is larger than the value of the In point  
timecode.  
DURATION OF ONE  
CLIP LIST MUST BE  
LESS THAN 24 HOURS.  
The total duration of the current clip list is greater than 24 hours.  
This appears when the total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 24 hours as  
the result of a sub clip ADD operation or a TRIM operation (see page 76).  
NO MORE SUB CLIPS  
CAN BE ADDED TO  
THE CLIP LIST.  
The upper limit of sub clips in the current clip list has been exceeded.  
This appears when the upper limit of 300 clips in a clip list has been exceed as the result of a  
sub clip ADD operation. (see page 76).  
SUB CLIP DOES NOT  
EXIST.  
There are no sub clips in the current clip list.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute a MOVE, TRIM, DELETE, or TC PRESET  
operation (see page 76) with no sub clips in the current clip list.  
CLIP LIST DOES NOT  
EXIST.  
There are no clip lists on the disc.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute a DELETE CLIP LIST operation (see page  
76) when there are no clip lists on the disc.  
MOVE IS INVALID.  
REC INHI!  
The sub clip cannot be moved.  
This appear when an attempt is made to execute a MOVE operation (see page 76) when there  
are no sub clip in the current clip list, or when there is only 1.  
The disc is write protected.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute an operation that requires recording while the  
disc is write protected.  
DISC FULL!  
The disc is full.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute an operation that requires recording while the  
disc is full.  
SHOT MARK DOES NOT  
EXIST.  
The specified shot mark has not been recorded.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute a DELETE SHOT MARK operation on a clip  
when the specified shot mark has not been recorded for that clip.  
REC START CANNOT  
BE DELETED.  
REC START cannot be deleted.  
This appears when an attempt is made to delete a REC START with a DELETE SHOT MARK  
operation. DELETE SHOT MARK can delete only SHOT MARK1 and SHOT MARK2 marks.  
CLIP IS LOCKED.  
The clip is locked.  
This appears when an attempt is made to delete a clip, set the clip thumbnail, or delete a shot  
mark when the clip is locked.  
ALL CLIPS ARE LOCKED.  
All clips are locked.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute a LOCK ALL CLIPS operation when all clips  
are already locked.  
ALL CLIPS ARE  
UNLOCKED.  
All clips are unlocked.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute an UNLOCK ALL CLIPS operation when all  
clips are already unlocked.  
Alarms relating to audio and video signals  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Action  
a)  
INPUT VIDEO IS NOT DETECTED.  
CHECK THE VIDEO INPUT MODE AND  
SUPPLY A VIDEO SIGNAL TO VIDEO  
INPUT.  
• Check the setting of V INPUT on the HOME page of  
the function menu (see page 88).  
• Input an HDSDI signal.  
No INPUT!  
122  
Troubleshooting  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Action  
a)  
INPUT AUDIO EMPHASIS IS NOT  
SUPPORTED.  
Check the emphasis of the audio input signal.  
EMPHASIS!  
CHECK THE EMPHASIS OF THE AUDIO  
INPUT SIGNAL.  
a) Displayed only when DISPLAY CONTROL >ALARM is set to “ON”.  
Alarms relating to sensors and drives  
Alarm message in time  
data display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Description/action  
FAN Stopped  
DR-FAN Stop  
High TEMP!  
FAN MOTOR STOPPED.  
Contact your Sony dealer.  
Note  
DRIVE FAN MOTOR STOPPED.  
HIGH TEMPERATURE.  
The unit will not stop operating, but if you continue to  
use it in this state temperatures inside the unit or the  
drive will rise, possibly resulting in failure or fire.  
HIGH TEMPERATURE IN DRIVE.  
Error Messages  
About i.LINK  
Error codes appear in the time data display when an error  
(usually a hardware problem) occurs. In addition, both  
error messages and error codes appear in the monitor video  
section and on the video monitor connected to the unit.  
When an error message appears, follow the instructions in  
the error message to resolve the problem.  
This section explains the specifications and features of  
i.LINK.  
What is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate  
devices equipped with i.LINK connectors. i.LINK allows  
your device to:  
Error code  
- Perform two-way transmission and reception of data  
such as digital audio and digital video signals.  
- Control other i.LINK devices.  
Error code in time data display section  
- Easily connect multiple devices with a single i.LINK  
cable.  
ERROR  
AN ERROR HAS BEEN  
DETECTED. INFORM SERVICE  
OF FOLLOWING CODE:  
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting to a wide  
range of digital AV devices for data transfer and other  
operations.  
Other advantages include the following feature. When  
connected to multiple i.LINK devices, your i.LINK device  
can perform data transfer and other operations not only  
with the directly connected devices but also with any of the  
devices that are connected to those devices. Therefore, you  
do not need to be concerned with device connection order.  
However, depending on the features and specifications of  
the connected devices, you may need to use certain  
functions differently, and you may not be able to transfer  
data or perform certain operations.  
50-010  
PRESS EJECT KEY  
TO EJECT DISC.  
Error code in monitor video section  
To Eject Discs with the Unit Powered  
Off  
i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by Sony, is a  
trademark supported by many companies worldwide.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE,  
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.  
As an emergency measure, disc cartridges can be removed  
with the unit powered off. This operation should always be  
done by a trained service technician.  
123  
About i.LINK  
           
Note  
Specifications  
The unit can be connected to one device with the i.LINK  
cable (DV cable). When you connect with a device that has  
two or more i.LINK connectors, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with the connected device.  
General  
External dimensions (w/h/d, excluding projections)  
307 × 100 × 411 mm  
About data transfer speed of i.LINK  
1
1
(12 / × 4 × 16 / inches)  
8
4
i.LINK defines maximum data transfer speeds of  
1)  
approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps that are referred  
to as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.  
The maximum data transfer speed that an i.LINK device  
supports is identified on the specifications page of the  
operating instructions supplied with the device or near its  
i.LINK connector.  
When you connect a device that supports different data  
transfer speeds, the actual data transfer speeds may be  
different from those indicated on the i.LINK connectors.  
1) What is Mbps?  
Megabits per second. A measure of the rate at which data  
is transmitted per second. In case of 100 Mbps, 100  
Megabits of data can be transmitted per second.  
i.LINK operation with this unit  
For details on operation when other equipment with an  
i.LINK (DV) connector is connected, see Chapter 2 (page  
27).  
For details on connection with an i.LINK cable and the  
necessary software, refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with the connected device.  
1
307(12 /8)  
in mm (inches)  
Mass  
Power requirements  
100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
Power consumption  
0.79-0.33 A  
Peak inrush current  
7.2 kg (15 lb 13 oz)  
Use Sony i.LINK cables  
Use Sony i.LINK cables to connect the i.LINK devices.  
6 pins y 4 pins (For DV dubbing)  
6 pins y 6 pins (For DV dubbing)  
(1) Power ON, current probe method:  
45 A (240 V), 15 A (100 V)  
(2) Hot switching inrush current,  
measured in accordance with  
European standard EN55103-1: 7 A  
(230 V)  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
Operating temperature  
5ºC to 40ºC (41ºF to 104ºF)  
Storage and transport temperature  
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to +140ºF)  
Operating relative humidity (no condensation allowed)  
25% to 80% (RH)  
Storage and transport relative humidity (no condensation  
allowed)  
20% to 90%  
System  
Recording format  
Video  
MPEG HD: HQ35/SP25/LP18 Mbps  
DVCAM: 25 Mbps  
MPEG-4  
1)  
Proxy video  
Audio  
MPEG HD: 16 bits, 48 kHz, 4/2 channels  
124  
Specifications  
   
DVCAM: 16 bits/48 kHz, 4 channels  
A-law 8 bits, 8 kHz, 4 channels  
Compression MPEG2 MP@HL  
Proxy audio  
Playback format  
Composite output (DV recording and DV  
playback)  
Video  
MPEG HD: HQ35/SP25/LP18 Mbps  
Frequency response  
DVCAM: 25 Mbps  
MPEG-4  
50I: 0 to 4.8 MHz +1.0/–3.0 dB  
60I: 0 to 4.2 MHz +1.0/–3.0 dB  
1)  
Proxy video  
Audio  
MPEG HD: 16 bits/48 kHz, 4/2 channels  
DVCAM: 16 bits/48 kHz, 4 channels  
A-law 8 bits, 8 kHz, 4 channels  
S/N (Y)  
Y/C delay  
K-factor (K2T) 2% or less  
53 dB or more  
25 ns or less  
Proxy audio  
1) The MPEG-4 Codec is a product of Ingenient Technologies, Inc.  
Audio performance  
Sampling frequency  
48 kHz  
Recording/playback times  
PFD23/PFD23A discs  
Recording  
format  
4-channel  
audio  
Mode  
2-channel  
audio  
Quantization  
Headroom  
16 bits/2 channels or 16 bits/4 channels  
20/18/16/12 dB (selectable)  
Frequency response  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5/–1.0 dB (0 dB at  
MPEG HD  
HQ mode 65 minutes or  
more  
68 minutes or  
more  
1 kHz)  
SP mode Approx. 85  
minutes  
Approx. 90  
minutes  
Dynamic range 90 dB or more  
Distortion  
0.05% or less (at 1 kHz)  
LP mode 112 minutes or 122 minutes or  
more more  
DVCAM  
Approx. 85 minutes  
Input connectors  
PFD50DLA discs  
Digital video inputs  
HDSDI INPUT  
Recording  
format  
4-channel  
audio  
Mode  
2-channel  
audio  
BNC type (×1), complying with SMPTE  
292M  
MPEG HD  
HQ mode 145 minutes or 150 minutes or  
SDSDI INPUT (with PDBK-104 option board installed)  
more  
more  
BNC type (×1), complying with SMPTE  
SP mode Approx. 190  
minutes  
Approx. 200  
minutes  
259M  
i.LINK (HDV 1080i) (with PDBK-102 option board  
LP mode 248 minutes or 265 minutes or  
more more  
installed)  
6-pin type (×1), complying with IEEE  
1394  
DVCAM  
Approx. 185 minutes  
Analog video inputs  
REF VIDEO INPUT  
Note  
BNC type (×2, loop-through)  
HD Tri-level sync or SD composite sync  
(0.3 Vp-p/75Ω/sync negative)  
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT (with PDBK-104 option  
board installed)  
BNC type (×1)  
HD COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT (with PDBK-103  
option board installed)  
The recording and playback times listed above are  
approximate. Maximum recording times may vary  
depending on recording conditions.  
Search speed  
Jog mode  
Variable-speed mode  
–1 to +2 times normal speed  
–1 to +2 times normal speed  
Shuttle mode –20 to +20 times normal speed  
Fast forward mode  
+20 times normal speed  
Fast reverse mode  
BNC type (×4)  
Analog audio inputs  
AUDIO INPUT 1/3, 2/4  
XLR 3-pin, female (×2), +4/0/–3/–6 dBu  
(selectable), 10 kΩ, balanced  
–20 times normal speed  
Video performance  
Sampling frequency  
Digital audio inputs  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) INPUT  
BNC type (×2), 1/2ch, 3/4ch complying  
with AES-3id-1995  
Y: 74.25 MHz, R–Y/B–Y: 37.125 MHz  
Quantization  
8 bits/sample  
125  
Specifications  
Timecode input  
TIME CODE IN  
100Base-TX: complying with IEEE  
802.3u  
BNC type (×1), SMPTE timecode, 0.5 to  
18 Vp-p, 3.3 kΩ, unbalanced  
10Base-T: complying with IEEE 802.3  
Accessories supplied  
Vertical installation stand (2)  
Operating Instructions  
Output connectors  
Digital video outputs  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
English version (1)  
Japanese version (1)  
CD-ROM manual (1)  
BNC type (×2), complying with SMPTE  
292M  
Infrared remote commander (1)  
Warranty Booklet (1)  
XDCAM Application Software CD-ROM (1)  
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software  
PDZ-VX10 XDCAM Viewer  
PDZK-P1 XDCAM Transfer  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
BNC type (×1), complying with SMPTE  
259M  
i.LINK (HDV 1080i) (with PDBK-102 option board  
installed)  
6-pin type, complying with IEEE 1394  
Analog video outputs  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
BNC type (×1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync  
negative  
Accessories not supplied  
AC power cord  
• For the customers in the U.S.A and Canada  
Part number 1-551-812-41 (125 V, 10 A, about 2.4 m)  
• For the customers in the United Kingdom  
Part number 1-777-823-12 (250 V, 10 A, about 2.0 m)  
• For the customers in European countries other than the  
United Kingdom  
Phono jack (×1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync  
negative  
MONITOR OUT  
D-sub 15-pin (RGB or YPbPr)  
Analog audio outputs  
Part number 1-551-631-61 (250 V, 10 A, about 2.0 m)  
AUDIO OUTPUT 1/3, 2/4  
XLR 3-pin, male (×2), +4/0/–3/–6 dBu  
(selectable), 600 Ω, balanced  
AUDIO MONITOR  
Protocol Manual (part number 9-968-084-0X)  
PDBK-101 Network Board  
PDBK-102 MPEG-TS Input/Output Board  
PDBK-103 Analog HD Input Board  
PDBK-104 SD Input Upconverter Board  
Phono jack (×2) –to +1 dBu/  
47 kΩ/unbalanced (L, R, L+R)  
PHONES  
Stereo phone jack (×1), –to –14 dBu,  
8 Ω, unbalanced  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Digital audio outputs  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUTPUT  
BNC type (×2), 1/2 ch, 3/4 ch complying  
with AES-3id-1995  
Timecode output  
TIME CODE OUT  
BNC type (×1), SMPTE timecode, 2.2  
Vp-p 3 dB, 600 Ω, unbalanced  
Remote control connectors  
REMOTE(9P) D-sub 9-pin, female (×1), complying  
with RS-422A  
RS232C  
S400  
CONTROL  
D-sub 9-pin, male (×1)  
6-pin (×1), complying with IEEE 1394  
Minijack 4-pole (×1), for connection of  
RM-LG2  
Network (with PDBK-101 option board installed)  
RJ-45 type (×1)  
1000Base-T: complying with IEEE  
802.3ab  
126  
Specifications  
Notes  
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was  
recorded successfully. SONY WILL NOT BE  
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON  
ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS  
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE  
SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR  
STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT  
OF ANY TYPE.  
• Always verify that the unit is operating properly  
before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR  
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE  
LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS  
DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER  
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER  
EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR  
ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.  
127  
Specifications  
Using UMID Data  
Metadata is additional information recorded on discs along  
with audio-visual data. It is used to bring greater efficiency  
to the flow of operations from material acquisition through  
editing, and to make it easier to find and reuse material.  
As one of application of metadata, the UMID has been  
internationally standardized.  
What is a UMID?  
A UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique identifier  
for audio-visual material defined by the SMPTE 330M-  
2003 standard.  
A UMID may be either as a 32-byte Basic UMID or an  
Extended UMID, which includes an additional 32 bytes of  
Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes.  
For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.  
Extended UMID (64 bytes)  
Basic UMID (32 bytes)  
Instance  
Source Pack (32 bytes)  
Spatial  
Coordinates  
Time/Date  
8 bytes  
Universal label  
12 bytes  
L
Material Number  
Country Org  
User  
No.  
4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes  
1
16 bytes  
3 bytes  
12 bytes  
A globally unique ID is automatically recorded for every  
clip.  
The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional  
information such as location, time/date, company ID and  
so on.  
The UMID is applied as follows.  
Material No.  
ID generated when  
shooting  
Source Pack  
Shooting  
information (when,  
where and who)  
Same as the above  
Instance No.  
Same as the above  
Original material: 00 00 00  
Copied material: generation number (1 byte)  
+ random number (2 bytes)  
Distinguish between the  
original material and copied  
material  
Material source ID/  
detecting material  
Metadata pack that  
identifies the source of  
material unit by defining the  
when, where and who of  
the material unit with which  
it is associated.  
Using the Extended UMID  
Functions of UMID data  
UMID data enables the following:  
• Addition of a globally unique ID to every clip of audio-  
visual material. The unique ID is used to detect the  
material source and to link it with the original source  
material.  
You have to enter a country code, organization code and  
user code. Set the country code referring to the table in ISO  
3166, and set the organization code and user code  
according to the guidelines of your organization.  
128  
Using UMID Data  
   
• Distinguishing between original material and copied  
material. 00 is added to the Instance Number for original  
material.  
About the UMID ownership information  
COUNTRY (country code)  
Set the country code by entering an abbreviated  
alphanumeric string (4-byte alphanumeric string)  
according to the values defined in ISO 3166-1.  
There are about 240 country codes.  
• Recording with UTC time. UTC (coordinated universal  
time) is used when recording the UMID. Use of a  
universal time system enables uniform management of  
source material recorded all over the world.  
• Calculation of date differences. Source material is  
recorded using modified Julian dates (MJD), which  
enables easy calculation of date differences between  
different source material items.  
Find your own country code on the following web page.  
Refer to ISO 3166-1:  
http://www.din.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/  
codlstp1/en_listp1.html  
Setting UMID ownership information  
Proceed as follows.  
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part  
of the code occupies the first part of the 4 bytes and the  
remainder must be filled with the space character (20h).  
1
Select METADATA >STORE OWNER in the setup  
Example: Japan  
For Japan, the country code is JP, which is 2 bytes, or JPN,  
which is 3 bytes.  
Thus, enter the following:  
The STORED OWNERSHIP (UMID ownership  
information setting) screen appears.  
JP_ _  
or  
STORED OWNERSHIP  
JPN _  
COUNTRY  
ORGANIZATION  
USER  
_
_
_
where _ represents a space.  
ORGANIZATION (organization code)  
Enter a 4-byte alphanumeric string for the organization  
code.  
SHIFT: ( )( )( )( )KEY  
INC/DEC: JOG DIAL  
TO MENU: MENU KEY  
Notes  
• There are no problems in recording or playing back  
audio-video signals, even if the ORGANIZATION is not  
set.  
• Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the  
SMPTE registration office. When no organization code  
has been acquired, it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary  
string. As a rule, the code “00” must be entered.  
Freelance operators who do not belong to an origination  
should enter “~”.  
COUNTRY: Sets the country code.  
ORGANIZATION: Sets the organization code.  
USER: Sets the user code  
See the next item “About the UMID ownership  
information” for more information about these codes.  
2
3
Set the ownership information using the arrow buttons  
and jog dial.  
USER (user code)  
Arrow buttons: Select the item to set and the  
character input location (it blinks).  
Jog dial: Selects characters to input at the selected  
location.  
Enter a 4-byte alphanumeric string to identify the user.  
The user code is registered with each organization locally.  
It is usually not centrally registered.  
When the user code is less than 4 bytes, enter the user code  
at the beginning of the 4 bytes and fill the remainder of the  
string with the space character (20h).  
RESET button: Deletes all input data.  
To cancel the ownership information setting  
Press the MENU button.  
This user code is determined by the organization. The  
methods used depend on the organization.  
Press the SET button.  
Note  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears, and the  
ownership information set in step 2 is saved.  
User code cannot be entered when no organization code  
has been entered.  
See “System Menu” (page 90) in Chapter 6 for more  
information about system menu operations.  
129  
Using UMID Data  
     
MPEG-4 Visual Patent  
Portfolio License  
MPEG-2 Video Patent  
Portfolio License  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4  
VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE  
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A  
CONSUMER FOR  
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN  
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER  
THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD  
FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR  
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED  
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE  
PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2 PATENT PORTFOLIO,  
WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA,  
L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,  
COLORADO 80206.  
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE  
MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)  
AND/OR  
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS  
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A  
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY  
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO  
PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE  
MPEG-4 VIDEO.  
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage media storing  
MPEG-2 video information such as DVD movie which are  
sold/distributed to general consumers. Disc replicators or  
sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses  
for their own business from MPEG LA. Please contact  
MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA. L.L.C.,  
250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,  
COLORADO 80206  
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED  
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL  
INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO  
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL  
USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM  
MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM  
http://www.mpegla.com  
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/sales  
of any storage media storing MPEG-4 Visual video  
information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4  
Visual video information in any manner (such as online  
video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV  
broadcasting). Other usage of this product may be  
required to obtain license from MPEGLA. Please contact  
MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA, L.L.C.,  
250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,  
COLORADO 80206, http://www.mpegla.com  
130  
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License / MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License  
   
marks as part of Non-RealTime  
metadata, and uses them to display  
thumbnails.  
units of seconds using the number of  
frames as a reference.  
Glossary  
Proxy AV data  
HD tri-level sync  
Low-resolution data with a video  
bandwidth of 1.5 Mbps and an audio  
bandwidth of 64 kbps per channel.  
This unit records proxy AV data  
automatically whenever high-  
resolution MPEG HD or DVCAM  
data is recorded.  
AES/EBU  
An HDTV analog reference signal  
that applies to 59.94/50Hz systems.  
A sync signal defined in SMPTE  
274M with positive, negative, and  
zero values.  
A standard established jointly by the  
AES (Audio Engineering Society)  
and EBU (European Broadcasting  
Union) for serial transmission of  
digital audio. Two channels of audio  
can be transmitted via a single  
connector.  
HDSDI signal  
Abbreviation of HD Serial Digital  
Interface.  
A signal in the HDTV serial interface  
defined by SMPTE 292M.  
Reference video signal  
A video signal that contains a sync  
signal or sync and burst signals, used  
as a reference for synchronization of  
video equipment.  
Clip  
A recording unit. Clips are created  
every time recording starts and stops.  
i.LINK  
Clip list  
Another name for the IEEE1394-  
1995 standards and their revisions.  
XDCAM uses the i.LINK interface to  
transfer DV streams by the AV/C  
protocol, and to read and write  
MPEG HD and DVCAM data files  
by FAM (file access mode).  
SDSDI signal  
A list of locations in the material  
recorded on the disc, arranged in any  
order. Clip lists can be created with  
the scene selection function of this  
unit, and with the supplied PDZ-1  
Proxy Browsing Software.  
SD Serial Digital Interface. An  
interface standardized as SMPTE  
259M which enables the  
transmission of an uncompressed  
digital component stream.  
S/N  
Composite video signal  
A video signal in which luminance  
and chrominance are combined along  
with timing reference “sync”  
information to make composite  
video.  
Metadata  
Signal-to-Noise ratio. The relation of  
the strength of the desired signal to  
the accompanying electronic  
interference, the noise. If S/N is high,  
sounds are reproduced with less noise  
and pictures are reproduced clearly  
without snow.  
Information about the properties of  
video and audio content. XDCAM  
records metadata such as UMIDs and  
essence marks, and the supplied  
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software can  
be used to record information such as  
titles and comments.  
Drop-frame mode  
SMPTE time code runs at 30 frames/  
second, while the NTSC color  
Sub clip  
MXF  
One of the sections which make up a  
clip list. A sub clip may be part of a  
clip or an entire clip.  
television system runs at about 29.97  
frames/second. Drop-frame mode  
adjusts the running of time code to  
eliminate the discrepancy between  
time code value and actual time by  
dropping two frames from the time  
code value at the beginning of each  
minute except every tenth minute.  
Material eXchange Format. A file  
exchange format developed by the  
Pro-MPEG Forum. Equipment from  
different manufacturers can  
exchange files in this format.  
Thumbnail image  
A reduced still picture of video for  
display on a GUI screen. XDCAM  
creates thumbnail images from proxy  
video, and displays them as index  
pictures on GUI screens.  
Non-audio  
General term for audio signals other  
than linear PCM, such as Dolby E  
and Dolby Digital (AC-3).  
XDCAM can record non-audio as an  
input signal.  
1) Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.  
1)  
1)  
E-E mode  
Time code  
Electric-to-Electric mode. When you  
operate a VDR in E-E mode, input  
video and/or audio signals pass  
through electric circuits only and  
then come out from the output  
connectors, without passing through  
electromagnetic conversion circuits  
such as recording heads.  
A digitally encoded signal which is  
recorded with video data to identify  
each frame of the video by hour,  
minute, second and frame number.  
SMPTE time code is applied to  
NTSC system, and EBU time code to  
PAL and SECAM systems.  
Non-drop-frame mode  
A mode of advancing time code  
which ignores the difference in frame  
values between real time and the time  
code. Using this mode produces a  
difference of approximately 86  
seconds per day between real time  
and time code, which causes  
UMID  
Essence mark  
A type of metadata that may be set for  
a specified frame.  
For more efficient searches,  
XDCAM equipment records essence  
Unique Material Identifier. A  
standard (SMPTE 330M) for video  
and audio metadata. The Basic  
section of a UMID contains a  
problems when editing programs in  
Glossary  
131  
 
globally unique number and a  
material number for the identification  
of recorded material. An optional  
section called the “Source Pack”  
contains information such as the time  
and location of recording. A UMID  
with the Basic section only is called a  
Basic UMID. A UMID with the  
Source Pack is called an Extended  
UMID.  
User bits  
A total of 32 bits are provided in the  
time code which the user can use to  
record such information as date, reel  
number, or scene number on video  
tape or disc. Also called user’s bits.  
VBID (Video Blanking ID)  
This is a video ID signal, defined in  
the EIAJ CPR-1204 standard, which  
is inserted into VBS video output to  
enable the aspect ratio to be detected.  
The ID signal is inserted into line 20,  
VBI 283.  
132  
Glossary  
connections using the i.S400  
connections using the REMOTE  
Index  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT connectors  
connecting an external monitor  
A
AUDIOINPUT1/3and2/4connectors  
AUDIO OUTPUT 1/3 and 2/4  
Essence marks  
F
Audio recording  
D
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
Disc capacity  
B
C
deleting the most recent recorded  
displaying the status of the current  
G
including a clip selected in the  
loading a clip list from a disc into  
modifying the in and out points of  
H
ejecting with the unit powered off  
I
E
Editing control unit  
Index  
133  
 
searching with the chapter  
function 57  
searching with the expand  
function 55  
J
S
Search  
K
L
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION  
93  
M
Q
R
returning the factory default  
settings 107  
N
toadjusttheaudiorecordinglevels  
49  
to specify the frame to use as the  
thumbnail image 49  
using the Clip Continuous Rec  
function 50  
using the HDSDI remote control  
function 50  
when recording does not end  
normally 45  
Shot marks  
O
Status information (supplementary)  
42  
P
T
134  
Index  

Seagate MOMENTUS ST9320423AS User Manual
Seagate MOMENTUS ST250LT003 User Manual
Samsung Impression SGH A877RBAATT User Manual
Samsung GT S5250 User Manual
Samsung GH68 17262A User Manual
Samsung GALAXY S SGH T989D User Manual
Philips AX 5012 User Manual
Philips AJ 3240 User Manual
Oregon Scientific JMR868 User Manual
Numark Industries MX25 User Manual